Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

of+all+times

  • 1 τε

    τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).
    A as a Conjunction,
    I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second,

    ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ;

    δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491

    , cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375;

    τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8

    , cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b;

    λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13

    ; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g.

    ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7

    ;

    ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47

    ; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3;

    τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11

     (iii B.C.);

    κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494

    , cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times,

    ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530

    , cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives,

    ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56

    , cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.
    2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as

    ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22

    ; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as

    οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6

     (v.

    οὔτε 11.4

    ); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as

    οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67

    ; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.
    3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.
    a τε.. δὲ.. , as

    κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359

    , cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625;

    ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80

    ;

    διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3

    ; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.
    b

    μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291

    -3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.
    4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes,

    τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a

    ; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c;

    Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476

    ;

    κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5

    ; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.;

    δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242

    , cf. 253, 262, al.;

    εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5

    ; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.;

    ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11

     Def.7;

    πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18

     (iii B.C.);

    χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13

    , 61.1, 3.17.7;

    ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6

    , cf. 3.70.4;

    ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6

    , cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.);

    καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13

    , cf. 2.2.17;

    ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21

    , cf. 24, al.;

    ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4

    , cf. Gem.16.6;

    χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19

    , cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.
    II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g.

    Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7

    ; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293;

    ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308

    , cf. 327, 338, al.;

    τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47

    ;

    βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35

    ;

    ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c

    ;

    βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47

    ; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined,

    κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181

    ;

    μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194

    ; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193;

    ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24

    ;

    χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808

    ;

    ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927

    ; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives,

    διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168

    ;

    ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16

    ;

    θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427

    ;

    πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42

    :—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g.

    τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249

    , and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    ἄλλως 1.3

    .
    2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep.,

    σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99

    , cf. 1.400, al.; also

    τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469

    , cf. 8.162.
    3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.
    b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in

    καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9

    ;

    καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44

    ;

    καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68

    ; v. infr. c. 10.
    4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80;

    ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85

    ;

    ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100

    ;

    τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47

    , cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.
    5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.
    B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands:

    αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221

    ;

    οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147

    ;

    θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379

    , cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264;

    ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309

    , cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526;

    ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410

    ;

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    ;

    οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464

    ;

    ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228

    , cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322;

    ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32

    ;

    παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218

    ;

    αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294

    ; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307;

    τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733

    -4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83;

    ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201

    ;

    νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71

    ;

    κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592

    -4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499;

    νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265

    ;

    σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45

    , cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied);

    ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403

    , cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons,

    ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102

    ;

    οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86

    ; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521;

    μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410

    .
    2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g.

    Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334

    ;

    Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156

    ;

    δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395

    , cf. Il.17.249.
    3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:
    a the principal clause alone contains τε

    , ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218

    ;

    ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333

    ;

    εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165

    -6;

    ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530

    .
    b the subordinate clause alone contains τε

    , λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747

    ;

    ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207

    ;

    ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117

    , cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt.,

    ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221

    : it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.
    c both clauses contain τε

    , ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508

    -9;

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82

    -3.
    4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies,

    ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115

    ;

    πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447

    , cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105;

    βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52

    , cf. 18.485.
    5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160;

    ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338

    , cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332;

    κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438

    ;

    μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152

    : similarly in clauses with

    οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422

    ;

    οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160

    , cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.
    6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608;

    ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655

    ;

    ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582

    ;

    αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252

    , cf. 24.294;

    οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120

    ;

    δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238

    , cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415;

    οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293

    , cf. 14.464;

    πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217

    ;

    οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223

    .
    7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent,

    Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259

    ;

    Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39

    ;

    Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227

    , cf. 20.187;

    νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8

    ;

    Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84

    : similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects,

    οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43

    , cf. 2.669, Od.5.4;

    Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319

    ;

    Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246

    ;

    Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493

    ;

    τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203

    , cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν)

    ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467

    ; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary,

    οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649

    ;

    ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187

    ;

    τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105

    ;

    σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336

    ;

    καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357

    , cf. 346.
    8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g.

    Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85

    ;

    ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65

    , cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ)

    δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90

    , cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305;

    δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562

    ; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature,

    ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142

    ;

    ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247

    , cf. Od. 6.266;

    ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521

    , cf. Od.14.353.
    9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it,

    κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305

    , cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined,

    ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367

    .
    10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life,

    γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358

    ;

    τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451

    ;

    ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473

    , cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358;

    ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347

    .
    11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535,

    ὡς εἴ τε 9.314

    , 14.254, etc.
    II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing)

    Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35

    , cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has

    τά πέρ τε 1.74

    ,

    ὅκως τε 2.108

     codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al.,

    οἷά τε 1.93

     codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally

    ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17

    ;

    ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8

     (ii B.C.);

    ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3

     (iii B.C.);

    οἵ τε GDI215.23

     (Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962;

    ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1

    ; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which)

    ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5

    ;

    οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28

    .
    C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:
    1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats,

    σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13

    ;

    ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362

    ; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in

    οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367

    , cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in

    ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106

    ;

    σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836

    ; μέν τε in

    σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47

    , cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in

    οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204

    , cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.
    2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions,

    σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90

    , cf. Od.19.486;

    ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337

    ; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ')

    ἐᾶν 16.96

     (nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ')

    ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118

    ; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.
    3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him,

    ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55

    ;

    σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119

    , 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187;

    ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169

    ;

    οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52

    .
    4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference,

    κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270

    ; ὥς (= so)

    τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227

    ;

    τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28

    ; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166;

    εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83

     (s.v.l.);

    ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317

    ;

    νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456

    ;

    πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342

    ;

    δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466

    ;

    ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252

    ; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ')

    , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437

    , 21.596, cf. 15.709.
    5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18;

    ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203

    ;

    ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189

     (but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259);

    ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803

    , cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.
    6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning,

    χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244

    , cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.
    8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.
    9 in

    ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276

    , it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.
    10 Rarer and later uses;
    a also, esp. with

    ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29

    , cf. 17.273, Il.23.483;

    ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9

    , cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.);

    ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1

     (iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.);

    τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74

     (ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.
    b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word,

    εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238

    , cf. 15.484.
    c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.
    D Position of τε:
    1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317;

    ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136

    , cf. 4.505, 7.295;

    αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42

     codd., cf. 291 (anap.);

    ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69

    ;

    ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6

     (iii B.C.);

    τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a

    , cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε

    , τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41

     (lyr.);

    πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210

    ; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows,

    πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665

    ; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.
    2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.
    E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε

  • 2 καιρός

    καιρός, οῦ, ὁ (Hes.+; loanw. in rabb.)
    ① a point of time or period of time, time, period, freq. with implication of being esp. fit for someth. and without emphasis on precise chronology
    ⓐ gener. (cp. Just., D. 32, 4 τὸν γὰρ καιρὸν [Da 7:26] ἑκατὸν ἔτη ἐξηγεῖσθε λέγεσθαι) κ. δεκτός a welcome time 2 Cor 6:2a (Is 49:8); cp. vs. 2b. καιροὶ χαλεποί difficult times 2 Ti 3:1. In ref. to times of crisis for the state λοιμικοῦ καιροῦ 1 Cl 55:1 (s. JFischer ad loc. note 322) καιροὶ καρποφόροι fruitful times or seasons (so Achmes 156, 15f: καρποφόρος is the καιρός in which the tree bears fruit, in contrast to late autumn, when there is no more) Ac 14:17 (OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f proposes, on the basis of Mod. Gk., the mng., ‘weather’, but the pl. is against this mng.). καιροὶ ἐαρινοί 1 Cl 20:9.—ἔσται καιρὸς ὅτε there will come a time when 2 Ti 4:3; εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον κ. to what time or what sort of time (some, e.g. NRSV, interpret τίνα=the person, but cp. PTebt 25, 18 [117 B.C.] καὶ διὰ τίνος καὶ ἀπὸ ποίου ἐπιδείγματος; s. ποῖος 1aα, also ποτατός) 1 Pt 1:11. ἄχρι καιροῦ until (another) time, for a while Lk 4:13; Ac 13:11; ἐν καιρῷ ὀλίγῳ in a little time 1 Cl 23:4; ἐν παντὶ κ. at all times, always (Aristot. 117a, 35; Sir 26:4) Lk 21:36; Eph 6:18; Hm 5, 2, 3. κατὰ καιρόν from time to time, regularly (TestJob 36:4; Lucian, Hermot. 10; Plut., Mor. 984d) J 5:4 (s. 2 also); 1 Cl 24:2; GJs 3:3; πρὸς κ. for a limited time (perh. also for the present moment; cp. Strabo 6, 2, 3; Ps.-Plut., Fluv. 23; BGU 265, 20 [II A.D.]; 618, 19; 780, 14; Wsd 4:4; Philo, Post. Cai. 121; Jos., Bell. 6, 190; Tat. 13, 1) Lk 8:13; 1 Cor 7:5. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας (a combination of πρὸς κ. and πρὸς ὥραν [2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5; Phlm 15; J 5:35]) for a short time (cp. our ‘for a short space of time’) 1 Th 2:17.
    ⓑ a moment or period as especially appropriate the right, proper, favorable time ἐν καιρῷ at the right time (X., An. 3, 1, 39; Diod S 36, 7, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 8 §29; SIG 1268 [Praecepta Delphica II, 6; III B.C.]) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42 (cp. on both Ps 103:27, w. v.l.). καιρῷ (Thu. 4, 59, 3 v.l.; Diog. L. 1, 41) Lk 20:10 (v.l. ἐν κ.). τῷ καιρῷ Mk 12:2. ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμός, ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος the proper time for me (you) J 7:6, 8 (Eunap., Vi. Iambl. p. 459 Didot: the worker of miracles acts ὅταν καιρὸς ᾖ). νῦν κ. ταῦτα ὑμᾶς μαθεῖν οὐκ ἔστιν now is not the time for you to learn this AcPl Ha 1, 26 (Just., D. 8, 1 ἃ νῦν κ. οὐκ ἔστι λέγειν al.).—καιρὸν λαβεῖν find a favorable time, seize the opportunity (Lysias, C. Agor. 6; Cleanthes [III B.C.]: Stoic. I no. 573; Diod S 2, 6, 5; EpArist 248; Jos., Bell. 1, 527, Ant. 4, 10; cp. PTebt 332, 9). καιρὸν μεταλαβεῖν (s. μεταλαμβάνω 2) Ac 24:25. λαβεῖν κ. εὔθετον find a convenient opportunity Pol 13:1. κ. ἔχειν have opportunity (Thu. 1, 42, 3; Pla., Ep. 7, 324b; Plut., Lucull. 501 [16, 4]; PFlor 259, 3; 1 Macc 15:34; Jos., Ant. 16, 73; 335; Ath., R. 23 p. 77, 6; Did., Gen. 112, 10) Gal 6:10; Hb 11:15; 2 Cl 16:1; ISm 9:1; IRo 2:1. ὀλίγον καιρὸν ἔχειν Rv 12:12. ἐξαγοράζεσθαι τὸν κ. make the most of the opportunity Col 4:5; Eph 5:16 (s. ἐξαγοράζω 2). On Ro 12:11 v.l. s. δουλεύω 2aβ and b. κατὰ κ. Ro 5:6 is more naturally construed with ἀπέθανεν than with ἀσεβῶν (cp. κατὰ καιρὸν θεριζόμενος reaped in its proper time Job 5:26).—The concept of the appropriate time oft. blends with that of
    ② a defined period for an event. definite, fixed time. Abs. καιροί festal seasons (Ex 23:14, 17; Lev 23:4.—So perh. also beside θυσίαι in the Ins de Sinuri ed. LRobert ’45 no. 42) Gal 4:10 (κ. w. ἡμέρα as Polyaenus 8, 23, 17). τὰς τῶν καιρῶν ἀλλαγὰς καταδιαιρεῖν … ἃ μὲν εἰς ἑορτάς, ἃς δὲ εἰς πένθη to set up periods of fasting and mourning in accord with changes in seasons Dg 4:5.—Not infreq. w. a gen., which indicates the reason why the time is set apart (Pla., Leg. 4, 709c χειμῶνος καιρός; Aesop, Fab. 258 P.=255 H-H./206 Ch. ἀπολογίας κ., also oft. LXX; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 191 κ. εὐφροσύνης; Jos., Ant. 18, 74; Tat. 36, 1 κατʼ ἐκεῖνον αὐτὸν … τὸν τοῦ πολέμου κ.; Hippol., Ref. 9, 30, 27 κ. τῆς παρουσίας; Did., Gen. 175, 2 κ. τοῦ ἐξελθεῖν εἰς τὴν γῆν) κ. θερισμοῦ time of harvest Mt 13:30 (JosAs 2:19). κ. τῶν καρπῶν time when the fruit is ripe 21:34; cp. vs. 41. κ. σύκων time when the figs are ripe Mk 11:13 (ParJer 5:31; cp. Horapollo 2, 92 ὁ κ. τῶν ἀμπέλων). κ. μετανοίας time for repentance 2 Cl 8:2. κ. πειρασμοῦ Lk 8:13b. ὁ κ. τῆς ἀναλύσεως the time of death 2 Ti 4:6. κ. ἐπισκοπῆς σου Lk 19:44. κ. διορθώσεως Hb 9:10. κ. ἡλικίας 11:11. κ. τῆς ἡγεμονίας Ποντίου Πιλάτου the time of the procuratorship of P. P. IMg 11. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ μαρτυρίου at the time of martyrdom EpilMosq 2 (cp. Mel., HE 4, 26, 3 ᾧ Σάγαρις καιρῷ ἐμαρτύρησεν). ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ καιρῷ (Num 9:7) 2 Th 2:6. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν the time set for the fulfillment of Gabriel’s words Lk 1:20; cp. Dg 11:5 (s. διαγγέλλω 2). ὁ κ. μου my time=the time of my death Mt 26:18. κ. τοῦ ἰαθῆναι time to be healed 2 Cl 9:7. κ. τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα 1 Pt 4:17; cp. the extraordinary ἦλθεν ὁ κ. τῶν νεκρῶν κριθῆναι καὶ δοῦναι = ἵνα κριθῶσιν οἱ νεκροὶ καὶ δῷς Rv 11:18.—Pl. (Num 9:3 κατὰ καιρούς; Tob 14:4 S πάντα συμβήσεται τοῖς καιροῖς αὐτῶν; Heraclit. Sto. 11 p. 18, 18=the periods of time between; Maximus Tyr. 1, 2f πολλοὶ κ.; TestNapht 7:1 δεῖ ταῦτα πληρωθῆναι κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς αὐτῶν; Ar. 4, 2 κατὰ καιρούς) καιροὶ ἐθνῶν times of the Gentiles (in which they may inflict harm on God’s people or themselves be converted) Lk 21:24.—κατὰ καιρόν at the appropriate time (Arrian, Anab. 4, 5, 1; PSI 433, 4 [261 B.C.]; Just., A I, 19, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 3) J 5:4; 1 Cl 56:15 (Job 5:26). Also ἐν καιρῷ (Himerius, Or 13 [Ecl. 14], 3): ἐν καιρῷ αὐτοῦ B 11:6, 8 (Ps 1:3). καιρῷ ἰδίῳ in due time Gal 6:9. Pl. καιροῖς ἰδίοις at the right time 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; cp. 1 Cl 20:4 (Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰδίων κ.).—κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον καιρόν vs. 10.—πεπλήρωται ὁ κ. the time (determined by God) is fulfilled Mk 1:15. Pl. (cp. Ps 103:19) ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιρούς he (God) has determined allotted times (MDibelius, SBHeidAk ’38/39, 2. Abh. p. 6f, ‘seasons’; cp. 1QM 10, 12–15; FMussner, Einige Parallelen [Qumran and Areopagus speech], BZ 1, ’57, 125–30) Ac 17:26; cp. κατὰ καιροὺς τεταγμένους 1 Cl 40:1; ὡρισμένοις καιροῖς καὶ ὥραις vs. 2; τοῖς προστεταγμένοις κ. vs. 4.
    ③ a period characterized by some aspect of special crisis, time
    ⓐ gener.: the present (time) Ro 13:11; 12:11 v.l. ὁ καιρός (i.e. the crisis involving Christians) ἀπαιτεῖ σε the times call upon you IPol 2:3 (Diod S 17, 27, 2 ὑπὸ τῶν καιρῶν προεκλήθησαν=they were called out by the [critical circumstances of the] times). Also ὁ νῦν κ. (PSI 402, 7 [III B.C.] ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ) Ro 3:26; 8:18; 11:5; 2 Cor 8:14; B 4:1. κ. ὁ νῦν τῆς ἀνομίας the present godless time 18:2 (s. also b below). ὁ κ. ὁ ἐνεστηκώς (Polyb. 1, 60, 9; Jos., Ant. 16, 162) Hb 9:9; ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ κ. at that time, then (Gen 21:22; Is 38:1; τῷ κ. ἐκείνῳ TestSol D 8, 2) Mt 11:25; 12:1; 14:1; cp. Eph 2:12. Also κατʼ ἐκεῖνον τὸν κ. (Jos., Ant. 1, 171, Vi. 49; GJs 10:2.—Diod S 2, 27, 1 and Vi. Aesopi G 81 P. κατʼ ἐκείνους τοὺς καιρούς=at that time. Cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 10.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. ἔτι κατὰ καιρὸν ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν for those who at that time were still godless Ro 5:6, though κατὰ κ. here prob.=at the right time, as in mng. 1b above (s. B-D-F §255, 3). τῷ τότε τῆς ἀδικίας καιρῷ … τὸν νῦν τῆς δικαιοσύνης Dg 9:1; cp. 9:2. Of the future κατὰ τ. καιρὸν τοῦτον at this time Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10, 14). Cp. EpilMosq 2 in 2 above. ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ κ. just at that time (2 Esdr 5:3) Lk 13:1. W. attraction of the relative ἐν ᾧ κ. at that time, then Ac 7:20. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν ὸ̔ν καὶ πέρυσι at the same time as in the year preceding Hv 2, 1, 1.
    ⓑ One of the chief terms relating to the endtime: ὁ καιρός the time of crisis, the last times (FBusch, Z. Verständnis d. synopt. Eschatol. Mk 13 neu untersucht ’38; GDelling, D. Zeitverständn. des NTs ’40; WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; WKümmel, Verheissung. u. Erfüllung ’45,3 ’56; OCullmann, Christus u. d. Zeit ’46 [tr. FFilson, Christ and Time ’50, 39–45; 79; 121]) ὁ κ. ἤγγικεν Lk 21:8. ὁ κ. ἐγγύς Rv 1:3; 22:10. οὐκ οἴδατε πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν Mk 13:33. Cp. Ro 13:11 (s. 3a above) if it is to be interpreted as eschatological (cp. Plut., Mor. 549f). πρὸ καιροῦ before the endtime and the judgment Mt 8:29; 1 Cor 4:5. ἐν καιρῷ 1 Pt 5:6. Also ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1:5; D 16:2. Pl. πλήρωμα τῶν καιρῶν Eph 1:10. ἐπηρώτων … περὶ τῶν καιρῶν, εἰ ἤδη συντέλειά ἐστιν Hv 3, 8, 9. τὰ σημεῖα τ. καιρῶν the signs of the (Messianic) times Mt 16:3. τοὺς καιροὺς καταμάνθανε learn to understand the times IPol 3:2 (s. WBauer, Hdb. Suppl. vol. ad loc.) The Messianic times described as καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως Ac 3:20.—ἔσχατοι καιροί (or ὕστεροι καιροί 1 Ti 4:1) come before the ἔσχατος κ. IEph 11:1 (cp. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων κ. AcPl Ha 8, 26 [restoration is certain=Ox 1601, 40/BMM recto 34]); χρόνοι ἢ καιροί times and seasons (cp. Iren. 1, 17, 2 [Harv. I 168, 9] and καιρῶν κατὰ χρόνους ἀλλαγή Theoph. Ant. 1, 6 [p. 70, 1]; Artem. 4, 2 p. 203, 25f the χρόνος is divided into καιροὶ καὶ ὧραι), which must be completed before the final consummation Ac 1:7 (Straton of Lamps. in FWehrli, Die Schule des Aristoteles, V Fgm. 10, 32f κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς καὶ τοὺς χρόνους; quoted in JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62, 33; see also Diog. L. 5, 64); cp. 1 Th 5:1. συντέμνειν τοὺς καιρούς shorten the (last) times B 4:3. Sim. in sg. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν 1 Cor 7:29.—The expr. καιρὸν καὶ καιροὺς κ. ἥμισυ καιροῦ also belongs to the eschatol. vocab.; it means the apocalyptic time of 1 + 2 + ½ = 3½ years, during which acc. to Da 12:7 (cp. 7:25) a tyrranical enemy of God and God’s people is to reign on earth Rv 12:14 (in imagery of a serpentine monster, δράκων)—ὁ κ. οὗτος the present age (cp. αἰών 2a) Mk 10:30; Lk 12:56; 18:30. Also ὁ νῦν κ. B 4:1. As ruled by the devil: ὁ ἄνομος κ. 4:9. καταργεῖν τὸν κ. τοῦ ἀνόμου destroy the age of the lawless one 15:5. The soul seeks και[ρο]ῦ χρόνου αἰ̣ῶ̣νος ἀνάπαυσιν ἐ̣[ν] σιγῇ peace in silence, at the time of the aeon crisis GMary 463, 1.—On Dg 12:9 s. the editions of vGebh.-Harnack and Bihlmeyer.—JMánek, NTS 6, ’59, 45–51; JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62.—B. 954. Schmidt, Syn. II 54–72. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καιρός

  • 3 πάντοτε

    πάντοτε adv. (on the formation Schwyzer I 629) of time (Hellenist. and Mod. Gk.; Dionys. Hal.+; Peripl. Eryth. 29; Epict., Ench. 14, 1; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 37; Herodian 3, 9, 8; Artem. 4, 20; Plut.; Athen.; Diog. L.; OGI 458, 76 [I B.C.], SIG 814, 37 [67 A.D.]; BGU 1123, 8 [I B.C.]; PGiss 17, 4; 72, 11 [II A.D.]; Wsd 11:21; 19:18; TestSol, Test12Patr; JosAs 7:6; SyrBar 12:2; Jos., Bell. 3, 42; Just., D. 49, 7; 93, 4; Ath., R. 1 p. 49, 1 al.—The Atticists preferred ἑκάστοτε, διαπαντός, or ἀεί [Phryn. 103 Lob.]) always, at all times Mt 26:11ab; Mk 14:7ab; Lk 15:31; 18:1; J 6:34; 7:6 (seven times in J); Ro 1:10; 1 Cor 1:4; 15:58; 2 Cor 2:14 (27 times in Paul); Hb 7:25 (not found in Ac and Cath. Epistles; B-D-F §105; cp. Rob. 300); Dg 11:4; IEph 4:2; Hv 1, 1, 7 (24 times in Hermas).—B. 984. DELG s.v. πᾶς. 35–41. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πάντοτε

  • 4 υἱός

    υἱός, ὁ (written ϝηιός in
    A

    Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1931.103

     (Nemea, vi B. C.)), declined regul. υἱοῦ, υἱῷ, υἱόν, but in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. only after 350 B.C. (exc.

    υἱός IG12.529

    ,530, 598, 625; ὑός ib. 585, 828; ὑόνib.70.8), and then always so: —in earlier [dialect] Att. and other Inscrr. inflected as a [pron. full] ῠ- stem (like πῆχυς), nom. υἱύς (written huihus) Klein Vasen mit Meister-signaturen 72 (Brit.Mus.Cat. 701) (

    ὑύς IG12.571

    , 670, 686; [var] contr. ὕς ib.663); gen. υἱέος (

    ὑέος IG22.4883

    ); dat. υἱεῖ: dual

    υἱεῖ Lys.19.46

    , written ηυιε in IG12.775 (corrupted to υἱέε in Pl.Ap. 20a cod. B), υἱέοιν: pl. υἱεῖς (

    ὑεῖς IG12.115.14

    , al.), υἱέων, υἱέσι (S.Ant. 571, Ar. Nu. 1001 (anap.)), ὑέ[σιν] (IG12.54.14), υἱεῖς (

    ὑεῖς IG22.1.73

    ): but gen. υἱέως, and acc. υἱέα, υἱέας, which are formed as though from nom. Υἱεύς, are rejected by Phryn.48,49, Thom.Mag.p.367 R., as not [dialect] Att., though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as

    υἱέα Euph. 5

    , Arr.Cyn.16,

    ὑέα IG42(1).244.4

     (Epid., ii B. C.), but υἱέως is f. l. in Th.1.13, J.AJ18.2.4, etc.): dat. pl. υἱεῦσιν is mentioned as a form that would be regular by Eust.1348.27:—Homer uses nom. υἱός (very freq.); gen. υἱοῦ only in Od.22.238, elsewh. υἱέος; dat. υἱέϊ or υἱεῖ; acc.

    υἱέα Il.13.350

     (cf. IGRom.4.360.29 (Pergam., hex.)), elsewh. υἱόν (very freq.): pl., nom.

    υἱέες Il.5.10

    , al., or

    υἱεῖς Od.15.248

    , 24.387, 497; gen.

    υἱῶν Il.21.587

    , 22.44, Od.24.223; dat. υἱοῖσι ([etym.] ν ) only Od.19.418, υἱάσι ([etym.] ν) Il.5.463, al. (never υἱέσι); acc. υἱέας ib. 149, al.:— he also uses the shorter forms, gen. υἷος, υἷι, υἷα, dual υἷε (distd. from the voc. sg. υἱέ by the accent), pl. υἷες, υἷας; but these were confined to [dialect] Ep.: their accentuation (in which codd. agree with Hdn.Gr.1.409) may preserve a trace of their Aeolic origin (v. infr.). The declension υἱῆος, υἱῆϊ, υἱῆα, υἱῆες, υἱήεσσι, υἱῆας (like βασιλῆος, etc., as though from Υἱεύς), belongs solely to later [dialect] Ep. poets, as A.R.2.1093, 1119, Nic.Fr.110, AP9.23 (Antip.), etc. Dialect Inscrr. have the foll. archaic forms, nom.

    υἱύς IG5

     (1).720 ([dialect] Lacon.), Leg.Gort.12.17 ( υιυις lapis); acc.

    υἱύν Inscr.Olymp.30

    , Leg.Gort.10.15; gen. υἱέος ib.6.3, Schwyzer 105 (Methana, vi B. C.); but

    υἱοῦ IG9(1).867

     (Corc., vii B. C.); nom. pl.

    υἱέες Leg.Gort.7.25

    ; acc. pl. υἱύνς ib. 4.40, IG12.407 (Cret. or Argive); dat. pl.

    υἱάσι Leg.Gort.4.37

     (as in Hom., influenced by θυγατράσι, πατράσι, which have ρα = ṛ, cf. Skt. pitṛ[snull ]u);

    ὑέεσσι IG14.10

     (Syrac.); υἷος in SIG55 (Thessaly, v B. C.) is perh. the [dialect] Aeol. gen. ( ὑός is nom. rather than gen. in IG12.828); acc.

    ὗα Schwyzer 625

     (Mytil., ii/i B. C.); a nom. ὑϊς (scanned - ?υἱόςX) IG12.472 (Boeotia, vi B. C.), cf. Simon.249 (v. infr.); nom. pl.

    ὗες IG22.3632.24

     (hex., Eleusis, ii A. D.). The initial syll. is both υἱ- and ὑ- in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. down to 400 B.C. (e. g.

    ὑεῖς IG12.115.14

    , ὑέ[σιν] ib.54.14, ὑόν v. supr.), afterwards ὑ-, but υἱός reappears under the Empire; in Plato cod. A usually has ὑιος, which is found also in T, cod. B always has υἱός, editors restore ὑός; acc. υἱόν is recommended by Phryn. l. c.; in Inscrr. of Pergamon, Magnesia, and Delphi, and in non-literary Papyri, ὑός is at all times less common than υἱός:— ὁ υεἱός CIG (add.) 3857p; dat. υεἱῷ ib.3846z82 (both Phrygia), cf. BCH11.471:—son, Il.6.366, etc.; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt as a son, Aeschin.2.28; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown-up sons, D. 25.88: metaph., Κόρον Ὕβριος υἱόν Orac. ap. Hdt.8.77: rarely of animals, Ev.Matt.21.5.
    2 periphr., υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, Il. 1.162, al.; cf.

    παῖς 1.3

    .
    3 generally, child, and so υἱ. ἄρρην male child, Apoc.12.5, PSI9.1039.36 (iii A. D.).
    4 freq. in LXX in periphrases (Hebraisms with various meanings),

    υἱὸς ἐτῶν ἑκατόν 100

     years old, Ge.11.10, al.;

    υἱοὶ ἀδικίας 2 Ki.7.10

    ;

    υἱοὶ θανατώσεως 1 Ki. 26.16

    ;

    υἱοὶ τῶν συμμίζεων

     hostages,

    4 Ki.14.14

    ; so

    υἱὸς εἰρήνης Ev.Luc.10.6

    .
    5 in some dialects, including the [dialect] Ion. Prose of Hdt., υἱός is replaced by παῖς: υἱός is rare in Trag., A.Th. 609, Fr. 320, E.Or. 1689 (anap.), al., and 7 times in S.: Hom. has both words in this sense.
    6 as a general term of affection, PGiss.68.2 (ii A. D.), POxy.1219.2 (iii A. D.); υἱέ, an author's address to the reader, LXX Pr.1.8, al.
    7 δάμου υἱός, υἱὸς πόλεως, Ἑλλάδος, as titles of honour, SIG804.10 (Cos, i A. D.), 813A,B (Delph., i A. D.), 854 (Eleusis, i A. D.).
    8 υἱοὶ ἀνθρώπων sons of men, periphr. for men (cf. supr. 2,4), LXXPs.89(90).3; οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀ. ib.Ge.11.5, Ev.Marc.3.28;

    υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου

     man,

    LXXEz.2.1

    ,3, al.; of the Messiah, ib.Da.7.13, Apoc.14.14; used by Jesus of himself, Ev.Matt.8.20, al. (by Stephen recalling the words of Jesus, Act.Ap.7.56).
    9 υἱοὶ Θεοῦ sons of God, implying inheritors of the nature of God (cf. supr. 4), Ev.Matt.5.9, cf. 45, Ev.Luc.6.35; implying participants in the glory of God, ib.20.36.
    b of Jesus, τὸ γεννώμενον κληθήσεται υἱὸς Θεοῦ ib. 1.35; ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, Ev.Matt.26.63, cf.Ev.Jo.1.34.
    c Θεοῦ υἱός, = Lat. Divi (sc. Caesaris) filius, patronymic of Augustus, BGU543.3 (27 B.C.), PTeb.382.21 (i B. C.), IG12(3).174.2 (Epist. ad Cnidios, 5 A. D.). [Hom.sts. has the first syll. short in nom., voc. and acc. sg.,

    οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱός Il.6.130

    ;

    Ἀμφιτρύωνος υἱός Od.11.270

    ;

    Ποδῆς υἱὸς Ἠετίωνος Il.17.575

    , cf. 590;

    Ἀνθεμίωνος υἱόν 4.473

    ;

    Σελάγου υἱόν 5.612

    ;

    Ἕκτορ, υἱὲ Πριάμοιο 7.47

    ; and Πηλῆος υἱός, Μηκιστῆος υἱός seem to be the better readings in 1.489, 2.566: in these places some other form ought perh. to be restored, but none of the known forms has a short [pron. full] ῠ: ὑός has [pron. full] ῡ in IG12.585 (vi B. C.), 828 (v B. C.), 2.2338, 22.4319 (both iv B. C.); Simon.l.c. seems to have used a monosyll. nom. υἷς, and Hdn.Gr. may have read it as ὕις ([etym.] ?υἱόςX?υἱόςX), but this is uncertain, as in Sch.Il.5.266 he seems to say that ὕις ( υἷις cod.) does not occur.] (Prob. from *sū-yú-s, cf. Skt. sūte 'procreate', Tocharian (A-dial.) se, (B-dial.) soyä 'son'; different suffix in *sū-nu-s, Skt. sūnūs, etc., and in *s[ucaron]-nu-s, OE. sunu, etc. (all = son); *sūyú- perh. became *s[ucaron]wyú-, then *suiwú-; υἱός and υἱόν perh. by dissimilation from υἱύς υἱύν, since the o-stem forms appear first where υ-υ would otherwise be repeated; ὗϊς ([etym.] ὑΐς) may be another dissimilation; the precise origin of υἷος υἷι υἷες etc. is uncertain.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > υἱός

  • 5 πέριξ

    πέριξ, strengthd. for περί, mostly [dialect] Ion. Prose and Trag. (in latter usu. Adv.):
    I Prep., round about, all round, c. gen., Hdt.1.179, 2.91, X.An.7.8.12, Epicur.Ep.2p.51U., etc.
    2 rarely c. dat., E.Ph. 710.
    3 commonly c. acc., Hdt.1.196, 3.158, 4.36, al.: mostly before its case, but also after, ib.52,79, as also in A.Pers. 368, dub. in E.HF 243.
    II Adv. round about,

    π. ὑπορύσσοντες τὸ τεῖχος Hdt.5.115

     ; π. λαβεῖν ἄνθρωπον to surround him, ib.87; κύκλῳ π. A.Pers. 418, dub. in S.Ant. 1301, E.Andr. 266 ; [

    Ὠκεανὸς] π. γᾶν ἀμπέχει Limen.10

     : metaph., πᾶν π. φρονοῦντες circuitously, E.Andr. 448 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    π. πολιορκεῖν Th.6.90

    ; ὁ π. τόπος, οἱ π., Pl.Ti. 62e, X.Cyr.1.5.2, cf. Epicur.Ep.2p.47U.; ὁ π. χρόνος, i.e. all times save the present, Arist.Int. 16b18 ;

    τὸ π. ὕδωρ Thphr.Sens.26

     ; later

    αἱ π. πόλεις Act.Ap.5.16

     ;

    αἱ π. κῶμαι SIG880.44

     (Pizus, iii A.D.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πέριξ

  • 6 πάντοτε

    + D 0-0-0-0-2=2 Wis 11,21; 19,18
    always, at all times
    Cf. SHIPP 1979, 438-439

    Lust (λαγνεία) > πάντοτε

  • 7 ζηλόω

    ζηλόω (s. ζῆλος) fut. ζηλώσω Ezk 39:25 (TestReub 6:5 ζηλώσετε [-σατε v.l.]); 1 aor. ἐζήλωσα; pf. ἐζήλωκα LXX (-σα v.l.) (s. ζῆλος; Hom. Hymns, Hesiod et al.; ins, pap; Thu. 2, 64, 4 ‘emulate, vie with’; Tat. 25, 1 ζηλῶν … τὸν κύνα ‘emulating the dog [the Cynic]’).
    ① be positively and intensely interested in someth., strive, desire, exert oneself earnestly, be dedicated
    ⓐ w. a thing as obj. τὶ (for) someth. (Eur., Hec. 255; Thu. 2, 37; Demosth. 20, 141; Polyb. 6, 25, 11 τὸ βέλτιον; Diod S 1, 95, 4; PSI 94, 9 ζηλοῖ τ. μάθησιν; Wsd 1:12; Sir 51:18 τὸ ἀγαθόν; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 261) ζ. τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα strive for the more valuable spiritual gifts 1 Cor 12:31 (JSmit, NTS 39, ’93, 246–64 [ironical]). τὸ προφητεύειν 14:39. τὰ πνευματικά vs. 1 (where beside the acc. a ἵνα-clause depends on ζ.).
    ⓑ w. a personal obj. τινά be deeply interested in someone, court someone’s favor, make much of, with implication of desiring the other to be on one’s own side (Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2 οἱ ζηλοῦντες ἐκείνους; Pr 23:17; 24:1; pass. Jos., C. Ap. 1, 225) Gal 4:17ab; 2 Cor 11:2. μηδέν με ζηλώσαι let nothing attract me (and turn me away fr. my purpose) IRo 5:3.—Abs. manifest zeal (Thu. 2, 64, 4) ζήλωσον take a stand, decide Rv 3:19 v.l. Laodicea is indecisive and is invited to show that the congregation is zealous about the Lord’s interests. Pass. καλὸν ζηλοῦσθαι ἐν καλῷ πάντοτε it is fine to be zealously courted at all times in what is fine Gal 4:18.
    ② to have intense negative feelings over another’s achievements or success, be filled w. jealousy, envy τινά toward someone (Hes., Op. 23; Hom. Hymns, Cer. 168; 223; Gen 26:14; 30:1; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 3 Jac.) τὸν Ἰωσήφ Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 37:11). Abs. Ac 17:5; 1 Cor 13:4; Js 4:2; 2 Cl 4:3; AcPl Ha 2, 11; 6, 31.—M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζηλόω

  • 8 ἰδού

    ἰδού demonstrative or presentative particle that draws attention to what follows (Soph.+). It is actually the aor. mid. impv. of εἶδον, ἰδοῦ, except that it is accented w. the acute when used as a particle (Schwyzer I 799) ‘(you) see, look, behold’ (for var. renderings see e.g. ESiegman, CBQ 9, ’47, 77f, fr. RKnox’s transl.).
    ① prompter of attention, behold, look, see. Like הִנֵּה it somet. serves to enliven a narrative
    ⓐ by arousing the attention of hearers or readers (in 1 Cl, 2 Cl, and B only in quots. fr. the OT) Lk 22:10; J 4:35; 1 Cor 15:51; 2 Cor 5:17; Js 5:9; Jd 14; Rv 1:7; 9:12; 11:14; Hv 1, 3, 4 al.
    ⓑ by introducing someth. new or unusual
    α. after a gen. abs., in order to introduce someth. new, which calls for special attention in the situation generally described by the gen. abs.: Mt 1:20; 2:1, 13; 9:18; 12:46; 17:5; 26:47; 28:11.
    β. with other constructions: καὶ ἰδού Mt 2:9; 3:16; 4:11; 8:2, 24, 29, 32, 34; 9:2, 3, 20 al.; Lk 1:20, 31, 36; 2:25; 9:30, 38; 10:25 al.; Ac 12:7; 16:1; PEg2 32. Also someth. quite extraordinary and yet ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες κ. ἰδοὺ ζῶμεν 2 Cor 6:9; cp. Mt 7:4; Ac 27:24 (contrary to all appearances).
    γ. introducing whole stories: Mt 13:3.
    δ. in the middle of a statement, and at the same time enlivening it Mt 23:34; Ac 2:7; 13:11; 20:22, 25.
    ε. w. emphasis on the size or importance of someth. (freq. omitted in transl., but w. some loss of mng.) ἰ. ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν πάντα Mt 19:27; Mk 10:28. ἰ. δέκα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη eighteen long years Lk 13:16 (cp. BGU 948, 6 ἡ μήτηρ σου ἀσθενεῖ, ἰδοὺ δέκα τρεῖς μῆνες; Dt 8:4); vs. 7; 15:29; 19:8; 2 Cor 12:14.—καὶ ἰ. ἐγὼ μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰμι πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας Mt 28:20; cp. 20:18; 23:38; Lk 2:34; 6:23; 13:30 al.
    ⓒ as a call to closer consideration and contemplation remember, consider, etc. Mt 10:16; 11:8; 22:4; Mk 14:41; Lk 2:48; 7:25; Hv 2, 3, 4. Likew. ἰδοὺ γάρ Lk 1:44, 48; 2:10; Ac 9:11; 2 Cor 7:11; AcPl Ha 6, 19. The citing of examples Js 3:4f; 5:4, 7, 11 belongs here. Variants in 3:3 include ἴδε (q.v.) and ἰδοῦ; the text has εἰ δέ.
    ② marker of strong emphasis, see used w. a noun without a finite verb, as in our colloquial ‘see!’ ‘what do you know!’ ‘of all things!’ ‘wonder of wonders!’ The term can be rendered here or there is (are), here or there was (were) or there comes (came), but oral rendition requires emphasis so as to express the nuance in the source text (old Attic ins in Meisterhans3-Schw. p. 203 ἰδοὺ χελιδῶν; Epict. 4, 11, 35; UPZ 78, 25 [159 B.C.]; LXX) καὶ ἰ. φωνὴ ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν and, see, a voice came from heaven or and a voice came right from heaven Mt 3:17. καὶ ἰ. ἄνθρωπος and there was a man Mt 12:10. ἰ. ἄνθρωπος φάγος Look! A glutton! 11:19; Lk 7:34; cp. 5:12, 18; 7:37; 11:31; 13:11; 17:21a; 19:2, 20; 22:38, 47; 23:50; Ac 8:27 (WCvanUnnik, ZNW 47, ’56, 181–91), 36; 2 Cor 6:2; Rv 12:3; 21:3. ἰ. ὁ νυμφίος here is the bridegroom Mt 25:6. ἰ. ὁ ἄνθρωπος here is the man J 19:5. In Rv as a formula εἶδον κ. ἰδού 4:1; 6:2, 5, 8; 7:9; 14:14; cp. 19:11. The godly pers. answers ἰ. ἐγώ here I am to the divine call, in order to signify willingness to obey God’s command (1 Km 3:4; TestJob 3:2) Ac 9:10. (In Mt ἰ. is found 62 times, in Mk 7 times [and also as v.l. Mk 13:23 and 15:35], in Lk 57 times, in J 4 times [including once in a quot.], in Ac 23 times, in Paul 9 times [including once in a quot.], Hb 4 times in quotations, Js 6 times, Jd once, 1 Pt once in a quot., Rv 26 times; it is not found at all in 1–3J, 2 Pt, Eph, Phil, Col, 1 and 2 Th, Pastorals, Phlm, Dg, Ign, Pol). S. Mlt. 11, w. note 1; MJohannessohn, ZVS 64, ’37, 145–260; 66, ’39, 145–95; 67, ’40, 30–84 (esp. on καὶ ἰδού); PVannutelli, Synoptica 2, ’38, xlvi–lii: ἰδού in the Syn. Gosp.; PFiedler, D. Formel ‘Und Siehe’ im NT: Studien z. A. u. NT 20, ’69; AVargas-Machucha, (καὶ) ἰδού en el estilo narrativo de Mt, Biblica 50, ’69, 233–44. See ἴδε.—DELG s.v. ἰδεῖν. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἰδού

  • 9 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    ① marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    ⓐ w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    ⓑ w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    ⓒ w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    ② marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    ⓐ w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    ⓑ with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    ③ marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    ④ marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    ⓐ w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.—To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    ⑤ marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    ⑥ marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    ⓑ w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    ⓒ after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    ⑦ marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    ⑧ marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    ⑨ marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    ⓐ w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    ⓑ w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    ⓒ w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    ⑩ marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    ⑪ marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    ⑫ marker of hostile opposition, against
    ⓐ w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    ⓑ w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    ⑬ marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    ⑭ marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    ⓐ w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    ⑮ marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    ⑯ marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    ⑰ marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    ⑱ marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    ⓐ w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    ⓑ w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    ⓒ w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 10 πολύς

    πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).
    ① pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).
    ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.
    γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).
    ⓑ comparative πλείων, πλεῖον
    α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.
    β. subst.
    א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.
    ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).
    ⓒ superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).
    ② pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)
    א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).
    ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.
    ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).
    ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.
    ⓑ comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως
    α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.
    β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.
    ⓒ superl. πλεῖστος, ον
    α. adj.
    א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).
    ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.
    β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).
    ③ pert. to being high on a scale of extent
    ⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.
    β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).
    γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.
    ⓑ superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)
    α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.
    β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς

  • 11 πᾶς

    πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν gen. παντός, πάσης, παντός (dat. pl. πᾶσι and πᾶσιν vary considerably in the mss.; s. W-S. §5, 28; cp. Rob. 219–21; on the use of the art. s. B-D-F §275) (Hom. +).
    ① pert. to totality with focus on its individual components, each, every, any
    ⓐ adj., used w. a noun without the art.
    α. in the sing. emphasizing the individual members of the class denoted by the noun every, each, any, scarcely different in mng. fr. the pl. ‘all’: πᾶν δένδρον Mt 3:10; Lk 3:9. πᾶσα φυτεία Mt 15:13. πᾶσα φάραγξ, πᾶν ὄρος Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4). πᾶς τόπος 4:37. πᾶς ἄνθρωπος J 1:9; 2:10; Ro 3:4 (Ps 115:2); Gal 5:3; Col 1:28abd; Js 1:19. πᾶσα γυνή GJs 11:2. πᾶν ἔθνος Ac 17:26a. πᾶσα ψυχή (Pla., Phdr. 249e) 2:43; 3:23 (cp. Lev 23:29); Ro 2:9; Jd 15. πᾶσα ἡμέρα Ac 5:42; 17:17. πᾶν σάββατον 18:4. πᾶσα ἀρχὴ καὶ πᾶσα ἐξουσία 1 Cor 15:24 (cp. Just., D. 111, 2 οὗ τὸ ὄνομα πᾶσα ἀρχὴ δέδιεν). πᾶσα συνείδησις 2 Cor 4:2. πᾶς ἅγιος Phil 4:21. πᾶς οἶκος Hb 3:4 (GJs 7:3). πᾶσα ἀντιλογία 7:7. πᾶσα παιδεία all discipline 12:11. πᾶς ὀφθαλμός Rv 1:7a. πᾶν κτίσμα 5:13a.—Mt 23:35; Lk 2:23 (Ex 13:2); 4:13; 21:36; 2 Th 2:4 (Da 11:36). πᾶσα κτίσις every creature Col 1:15; ἐν πάσῃ κτίσει to every creature vs. 23. πᾶσα γραφή 2 Ti 3:16 (s. γραφή 2a).—πᾶσα σάρξ (כָּל־בָּשָׂר; used in the OT, also En 1:9; TestGad 7:2; GrBar 4:10; but not in EpArist, Philo, nor Joseph.) all flesh Lk 3:6 (Is 40:5); AcPlCor 2:6 and 16 (s. also 3b below). Mostly w. a neg. (so also En 14:21; 17:6) οὐ (or μή) … πᾶσα σάρξ no flesh = no one Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; Ro 3:20; 1 Cor 1:29; Gal 2:16 (cp. GrBar 8:7 οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα πνοή). Other sim. neg. expressions are also Hebraistic (s. B-D-F §302, 1; Mlt-H. 433f) οὐ … πᾶν ῥῆμα not a thing, nothing Lk 1:37 (cp. PRyl 113, 12f [133 A.D.] μὴ … πᾶν πρᾶγμα). οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινόν I have never eaten anything common Ac 10:14. Cp. Rv 7:1, 16; 9:4; 21:27. Also in reverse order, πᾶς … οὐ or μή (Ex 12:16; Sir 8:19; 10:6, but s. also GLee, ET 63, ’51f, 156) 18:22; Eph 4:29; 5:5; 2 Pt 1:20; 1J 2:21; 3:15b.—Only rarely is a ptc. used w. πᾶς in this way: παντὸς ἀκούοντος when anyone hears Mt 13:19. παντὶ ὀφείλοντι Lk 11:4 (Mlt-Turner 196f).
    β. w. a noun in the pl., without the art. πάντες ἄνθρωποι all people/men, everyone (Lysias 12, 60; Andoc. 3, 25; X., Cyr. 7, 5, 52, Mem. 4, 4, 19; Demosth. 8, 5; 18, 72) Ac 22:15; Ro 5:12a, 18ab; 12:17, 18; 1 Cor 7:7; 15:19; 2 Cor 3:2; Phil 4:5; 1 Th 2:15; 1 Ti 2:4; 4:10; Tit 2:11. πάντες ἄγγελοι θεοῦ Hb 1:6 (Dt 32:43; cp. Demosth. 18, 294 πάντες θεοί).
    ⓑ adj. used with a noun or ptc. with the art.
    α. in the sing. Oft. πᾶς ὁ, πάσα ἡ, πᾶν τό is used w. a ptc. (B-D-F §413, 2 and 3) every one who, whoever πᾶς ὁ (Soph., Aj. 152; Demosth. 23, 97; Sir 22:2, 26; 1 Macc 1:52; 2:27) πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος Mt 5:22. Cp. vss. 28, 32; 7:8, 26 (=πᾶς ὅστις vs. 24; s. below); Lk 6:47; 11:10; 14:11; 16:18; 18:14; 19:26; J 3:8, 15f, 20; 4:13; 6:40; 8:34; 18:37; Ac 10:43b; 13:39; Ro 2:1, 10; 10:4, 11; 1 Cor 9:25; Gal 3:13; 2 Ti 2:19; Hb 5:13; 1J 2:23, 29 al.; 2J 9; Rv 22:18.—πᾶν τό everything that (1 Macc 10:41): πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον Mt 15:17; Mk 7:18. πᾶν τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:34. πᾶν τὸ πωλούμενον 1 Cor 10:25; cp. vs. 27. πᾶν τὸ φανερούμενον Eph 5:14. πᾶν τὸ γεγεννημένον 1J 5:4.—An equivalent of this expr. is πᾶς ὅς (or ὅστις), πᾶν ὅ every one who, whatever (s. above and s. B-D-F §293, 1; 413, 2; Rob. 727; 957), masc.: Mt 7:24; 10:32; 19:29; Lk 12:8, 10 (RHolst, ZNW 63, ’72, 122–24), 48; 14:33; Ac 2:21 (πᾶς ὸ̔ς ἐάν, s. Jo 2:32); Ro 10:13 (πᾶς ὸ̔ς ἄν, s. Jo 3:5); Gal 3:10. Neut. (Jdth 12:14.—Jos., Ant. 5, 211 πᾶν ὅ = πάντες οἱ): J 6:37, 39; 17:2b; Ro 14:23; Col 3:17 (πᾶν ὅ τι ἐάν).
    β. w. a noun in the pl., w. the art. all
    א. w. substantives: πᾶσαι αἱ γενεαί Mt 1:17; Lk 1:48; Eph 3:21; GJs 6:2 al. πάντας τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Mt 2:4. Cp. vs. 16; 4:8; 11:13; Mk 4:13, 31f; 6:33; Lk 1:6; 2:51; 6:26; J 18:20; Ac 1:18; 3:18; 10:12, 43a; 14:16; Ro 1:5; 15:11 (Ps 116:1); 16:4; 1 Cor 12:26ab; 2 Cor 8:18; 11:28; Eph 4:10; 6:16b; Col 2:13; 1 Ti 6:10; Hb 4:4 (Gen 2:2 and 3); 9:21; Js 1:8; Rv 1:7b; 7:11; 15:4 al.—Used w. a demonstr. pron.: πᾶσαι αἱ παρθένοι ἐκεῖναι Mt 25:7. πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 26:1. πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα Lk 1:65; 2:19.—Somet. following the noun: τὰς πόλεις πάσας Mt 9:35; Ac 8:40. οἱ μαθηταὶ πάντες the disciples, one and all Mt 26:56. αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι Ac 16:26a. Cp. Ro 16:16; 1 Cor 7:17; 13:2a; 15:7; 16:20; 1 Th 5:26; 2 Ti 4:21; Rv 8:3. οἱ Ἱεροσολυμῖται πάντες Mk 1:5.—On the position of ἐκεῖνος, ἕνεκα, πᾶς s. NTurner, VetusT 5, ’55, 208–13.
    ב. w. participles πάντες οἱ: πάντες οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες Mt 4:24. πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες 11:28; cp. 21:12; 26:52; Lk 1:66; 2:47; 13:17; Ac 1:19; 2:44; 4:16; 5:5, 11; 6:15; 9:14; 28:30; Ro 1:7; 4:11; 1 Cor 1:2; Eph 6:24; 1 Th 1:7; 2 Th 1:10; 2 Ti 3:12; 4:8; Hb 5:9; 13:24; 2J 1; Rv 13:8; 18:24. Following the ptc. οἱ κατοικοῦντες πάντες Ac 2:14. ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πᾶσιν 20:32.—πάντα τά: πάντα τὰ γενόμενα Mt 18:31. πάντα τὰ ὑπάρχοντα 24:47; Lk 12:44; 1 Cor 13:3. Cp. Lk 17:10; 18:31; 21:36; J 18:4; Ac 10:33b. Used w. a demonstr. pron.: περὶ πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων Lk 24:14. Following: τὰ γινόμενα πάντα 9:7.
    ג. w. prepositional expressions, w. which ὄντες (ὄντα) is to be supplied (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 24 [Stone p. 10] πάντα τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] πάντες σου οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις): πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Mt 5:15; Ac 16:32. πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ Lk 5:9. πάντες οἱ ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις J 5:28. πάντες οἱ εἰς μακράν Ac 2:39. Cp. 5:17. πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ Ro 9:6. Cp. 2 Ti 1:15; 1 Pt 5:14. πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς Ac 4:24; 14:15 (Ex 20:11); cp. 17:24. Following: οἱ μετʼ ἐμοῦ πάντες Tit 3:15a (πάντες οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ JosAs 27:7).
    ⓒ π. used w. pronouns
    α. w. personal pronouns: πάντες ἡμεῖς we all Ac 2:32; 10:33a; 26:14; 28:2; Ro 4:16b. πάντες ὑμεῖς Mt 23:8; 26:31; Lk 9:48; Ac 4:10a; 22:3; Ro 1:8; 15:33; 2 Cor 7:15; Gal 3:28; Phil 1:4, 7ab, 8; 1 Th 1:2; 2 Th 3:16c, 18; Tit 3:15b; Hb 13:25. πάντες αὐτοί Ac 4:33; 19:17b; 20:36. Following the pron.: ἡμεῖς πάντες J 1:16; Ro 8:32a; 2 Cor 3:18; Eph 2:3. ὑμεῖς πάντες Ac 20:25. αὐτοὶ πάντες Mt 12:15; 1 Cor 15:10. W. art. οἱ πάντες ἡμεῖς 2 Cor 5:10.
    β. w. a demonstr. pron.: πάντες οὗτοι these all, all these Ac 2:7 v.l. Mostly following the pron.: οὗτοι πάντες 1:14; 17:7; Hb 11:13, 39. πάντα ταῦτα Mt 6:32; 24:8; Lk 7:18; Ac 24:8; 1 Cor 12:11; Col 3:14; 1 Th 4:6; Hm 5, 2, 5 cj. Joly. ταῦτα πάντα Mt 4:9; 6:33; 13:34, 51; Lk 12:30; Ac 7:50; Ro 8:37; 2 Pt 3:11.
    γ. πάντες ὅσοι, πάντα ὅσα all who, everything that, masc.: Lk 4:40 v.l. (for ἅπαντες); J 10:8. Neut. (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 17 [Stone p. 20]; TestJob 4:2; GrBar 7:2; Philo, Aet. M. 15; 28; Jos., Ant. 8, 242; Just., A I, 44, 9) Mt 7:12; 13:46; 18:25; 21:22; Mk 11:24; 12:44b; Lk 18:12, 22; J 10:41. πάντες, ὸ̔ς ἄν Hs 7:7.
    ⓓ subst.
    α. πάντες, πᾶσαι all, everyone (even when only two are involved = both: Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 27 §105 [Caesar and Pompey]) Mt 10:22; 14:20; 15:37; 21:26; 26:27; Mk 1:37; 5:20; Lk 1:63 and oft. πάντες ἥμαρτον Ro 5:12 (on the sinfulness of πάντες cp. the saying of Bias s.v. πολύς 1aβא; FDanker, Ro 5:12, Sin under Law, NTS 14, ’68, 430, n. 1).—οὐ πάντες not everyone Mt 19:11. Cp. J 13:10; Ro 10:16.—πάντων as partitive and comparative gen. ὕστερον πάντων last of all Mt 22:27; cp. Mk 12:22, 43. Even in ref. to a fem. (Thu. 4, 52, 3; Aristoph., Av. 472) ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων Mk 12:28 (but s. B-D-F §164, 1).
    β. πάντα all things, everything. Abs. (Chrysippus in Stob., Ecl. 1, 1, 26 p. 31 W.; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6; M. Ant. 4, 23; Ael. Aristid. 43, 9 K.=1 p. 3 D.: ἀρχὴ ἁπάντων Ζεύς τε καὶ ἐκ Διὸς πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; Hymn to Selene in PGM 4, 2838f ἐκ σέο γὰρ πάντʼ ἐστὶ καὶ εἰς σʼ, αἰώνιε, πάντα τελευτᾷ [s. 4dβ]; PGM 5, 139; PKöln VI, 245, 16 of Athena [s. ed.’s comments]) Mt 11:27 = Lk 10:22 (s. the lit. on this pass. s.v. υἱός 2dβ. The word πάντα here is variously understood of authority and power [so ASchlatter (Mt), FBüchsel (TW II 173) et al.] or of knowledge and teaching: ENorden [Agn. Th. 288], TZahn [Mt], Grundmann [Lk] et al.; also JFitzmyer: “the knowledge of the mutual relation of himself and God” [AB Comm. Luke II 874]. IMarshall [Lk] follows BReicke [TW V 993 n. 289] and opts for both power and knowledge); J 1:3; 3:35; 21:17; 1 Cor 2:10; 15:27a (Ps 8:7), b, 28cd (πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν w. a somewhat different coloring: Dio Chrys. 54 [71], 1); Eph 1:22a (Ps 8:7); Rv 21:5. Here we may class ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων θεός (cp. Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 10; 13, 12, 4 ἐπὶ πάντων εἶναι τ. θεόν; Porphyr., Vi. Plot. 23 τῷ ἐπὶ πᾶσι θεῷ) God, who rules over all Ro 9:5 (θεός 2). ὁ πάντων δεσπότης GJs 20:3 (codd.); cp. 11:2.—Of a ‘whole’ that is implied fr. the context: πάντα ἀποδώσω σοι Mt 18:26. Cp. 22:4; Mk 4:34; Lk 1:3; Ro 8:28 (s. Black s.v. συνεργέω); 2 Cor 6:10; Gal 4:1; Phil 2:14; 1 Th 5:21; 2 Ti 2:10; Tit 1:15; 1J 2:27; GJs 18:3 codd. πάντα ὑμῶν ἐστιν everything is yours, belongs to you 1 Cor 3:21, cp. 22 (Plut., Cic. 873 [25, 4] πάντα τοῦ σοφοῦ εἶναι; Diog. L. 6, 72). πάντα ὑμῶν everything you do 16:14. πρῶτον πάντων 1 Ti 2:1. πάντα four times as anaphora (rhetorical repetition) 1 Cor 13:7 (cp. Libanius, Or. 3 p. 275, 4 πάντα φθεγγόμενοι, πάντα ἐργαζόμενοι, πάντα χαριζόμενοι).—The acc. of specification stands almost in the sense of an adv. (B-D-F §154; Rob. 487) πάντα in all respects, in every way, altogether (Hom. et al.; Aelian, VH 12, 25; Jos., Ant. 9, 166; SibOr 3, 205; Ath. 35, 2) Ac 20:35 (perh. always, as Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 22 p. 590); 1 Cor 9:25b. πάντα πᾶσιν ἀρέσκω (s. ἀρέσκω 2a) 10:33; 11:2. Cp. KGrobel, JBL 66, ’47, 366 and s. τὰ πάντα in 4dβ below.—W. a prep.: εἰς πάντα in all respects, in every way (Pla., Charm. 6, 158a, Leg. 5, 738a; Appian, Iber. 17 §64, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385; BGU 798, 7) 2 Cor 2:9. ἐν πᾶσιν in all respects, in every way (PGiss 69, 8; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 112 §467 [here ἐν ἅπασιν=in all respects]; Just., D. 80, 1 ἀσφαλὴς ἐν πᾶσι); 1 Ti 3:11; 2 Ti 2:7; 4:5; Tit 2:9, 10b; Hb 13:4, 18; 1 Pt 4:11. Perh. also Eph 1:23b. ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις in (or besides) all this (Sir 48:15; Job 2:10; 12:9; cp. Plut., Mor. 98f) Lk 16:26. κατὰ πάντα, s. κατά B 6. περὶ πάντων in every way (Mitt-Wilck I/2, 6, 9; SibOr 1, 198) 3J 2. πρὸ πάντων above all, especially (PRein 18, 27 [II B.C.]; BGU 811, 3; PAmh 135, 2; Just., D. 7, 3) Js 5:12; 1 Pt 4:8.
    ② any entity out of a totality, any and every, every
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing. without the article every, any and every, just any, any at all μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε do not believe just any spirit 1J 4:1. περιφερόμενοι παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκαλίας Eph 4:14. περὶ παντὸς πράγματος about anything Mt 18:19. κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any reason at all 19:3. Cp. 4:4=Lk 4:4 v.l. (Dt 8:3); Mt 12:31; 2 Cor 1:4b (on ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν vs. 4a see 3b below).
    ⓑ as subst. without the art.
    α. πᾶς everyone without exception Lk 16:16.
    β. πᾶν, w. prep.: διὰ παντός s. διά A 2a. ἐν παντί in every respect or way, in everything (Pla., Symp. 194a; X., Hell. 5, 4, 29; SIG 1169, 27; Sir 18:27; 4 Macc 8:3; GrBar 9:8) πλουτίζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:5; 2 Cor 9:11. Cp. 2 Cor 4:8; 7:5, 11, 16; 8:7; 9:8b; 11:6a, 9; Eph 5:24; Phil 4:6; 1 Th 5:18.
    ③ marker of the highest degree of someth., all
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing. without the art. full, greatest, all (Pla., Rep. 9, 575a; Demosth. 18, 279 al.; ins, freq. in accolades; pap.: New Docs 8 p. 62, 10 μετὰ πάσης πίστεως καὶ ἐπιμελείας ‘with all fidelity and care’; LXX; Tat. 39, 1 μετὰ πάσης ἀκριβείας) μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης Ac 4:29. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 5:23. πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ in all good conscience 23:1. Cp. 17:11; 24:3; 2 Cor 9:8b; 12:12; Eph 4:2. ἐν πάσῃ προσκαρτερήσει with the greatest perseverance 6:18c. Cp. Phil 1:20; 2:29; Col 1:11ab; 1 Ti 2:2b, 11; 3:4; 4:9; 5:2; Tit 2:15; Js 1:2; 2 Pt 1:5; Jd 3 al. ὑπομένειν πᾶσαν ὑπομονήν practice patient endurance to the limit Pol 9:1.
    ⓑ in related vein as adj. with noun in the sing. w. the art. all ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν in all our trouble 2 Cor 1:4a (on ἐν πάσῃ θλίψει vs. 4b s. 2a above); 7:4; 1 Th 3:7. ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν in all remembrance of you Phil 1:3. πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν all your care 1 Pt 5:7. τὸν πάντα χρόνον AcPlCor 2:4; τὴν πᾶσαν σάρκα 2:11 (cp. 1aα).
    ④ pert. to a high degree of completeness or wholeness, whole
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing., without the art. all, the whole before proper names, mostly geographic (X., Hell. 4, 8, 28 προστάται πάσης Λέσβου ἔσονται al.; LXX) πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα Mt 2:3 (s. Ἱερ.). πᾶς Ἰσραήλ (3 Km 8:65; 11:16; 1 Esdr 1:19; 5:45, 58; Jdth 15:14) Ro 11:26 (s. W-S. §20, 11a and b; Rob. 772). The OT is also the source of πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραήλ (1 Km 7:2, 3) Ac 2:36 and, in subject matter, ἐπὶ παντὸς προσώπου τῆς γῆς 17:26b (but Gen 2:6 has πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς, and 7:23; 11:4, 8, 9 ἐπὶ προσώπου [or πρόσωπον] πάσης τῆς γῆς).—Perh. πᾶσα οἰκοδομή Eph 2:21 (s. W-S. §20:11 b; Rob. 772; Mlt-Turner 199f; MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.; M. Ant. 6, 36, 1; OGI 383, 86ff).
    ⓑ w. a noun in the sing., w. the art. the whole, all (the). Preceding the noun that has the art.: πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία καὶ πᾶσα ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5. πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη the whole herd 8:32. Cp. vs. 34; 13:2; 21:10; 27:25, 45; Mk 2:13; 4:1. πᾶσα ἡ ἀλήθεια 5:33. πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις the whole creation (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 7 [Stone p. 32]) Mk 16:15; Ro 8:22. Cp. Lk 1:10; 2:1, 10; Ac 3:9, 11; 5:21; 15:12. πᾶς ὁ κόσμος Ro 3:19b; Col 1:6. πᾶν τὸ σπέρμα Ro 4:16. πᾶσα ἡ γῆ 9:17 (Ex 9:16); Lk 4:25. πᾶσα ἡ γνῶσις, πᾶσα ἡ πίστις 1 Cor 13:2bc. πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα Eph 3:19; Col 1:19; 2:9. πᾶν τὸ σῶμα Eph 4:16; Col 2:19. Cp. Hb 9:19bc. W. a demonstrative pron. πᾶς ὁ λαὸς οὗτος all these people Lk 9:13. πᾶσα ἡ ὀφειλὴ ἐκείνη Mt 18:32.—Following the noun that has the article: τὴν κρίσιν πᾶσαν the whole matter of judgment J 5:22. εἰς τὴν ἀλήθειαν πᾶσαν into truth in all its outreach 16:13. τὴν ἐξουσίαν … πᾶσαν Rv 13:12.
    ⓒ πᾶς and πάντες stand attributively betw. art. and noun, when the noun is regarded as a whole, in contrast to its individual parts (cp. Kühner-G. I 632f).
    α. sing. (Thu. 2, 7, 2 ὁ πᾶς ἀριθμόσ=‘the whole number’; 8, 93, 2 τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος; X., Mem. 1, 2, 8 εἰς τὸν πάντα βίον; Pla., Gorg. 470e ἡ πᾶσα εὐδαιμονία; 2 Macc 2:17; 3 Macc 1:29; 6:14; 4 Macc 3:8) ὁ πᾶς νόμος the whole law Gal 5:14. τὸν πάντα χρόνον Ac 20:18.
    β. pl. (X., An. 5, 6, 7 οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι; Pla., Theaet. 204a τὰ πάντα μέρη) αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαί all the souls Ac 27:37. οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντες Ἰουδαῖοι 21:21. οἱ σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντες ἅγιοι Ro 16:15. οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ πάντες ἀδελφοί Gal 1:2.—W. numerals (Hdt. 7, 4; Thu. 1, 60, l) οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα the whole number of the men was about twelve Ac 19:7.—JBover, Uso del adjetivo singular πᾶς en San Pablo: Biblica 19, ’38, 411–34.
    ⓓ as subst.
    α. οἱ πάντες all (of them) (in contrast to a part) Ro 11:32ab; 1 Cor 9:22 (s. HChadwick, NTS 1, ’55, 261–75); Phil 2:21. (We, they) all Mk 14:64; 1 Cor 10:17; 2 Cor 5:14b. μέχρι καταντήσωμεν οἱ πάντες until we all attain Eph 4:13.
    β. τὰ πάντα. In the abs. sense of the whole of creation all things, the universe (Pla., Ep. 6, 323d τῶν πάντων θεός; hymn to Selene in EAbel, Orphica [1885] 294, 36 εἰς σὲ τὰ πάντα τελευτᾶ [s. 1dβ beg.]; Herm. Wr. 13, 17 τ. κτίσαντα τὰ πάντα; JosAs 8:2 ζωοποιήσας τὰ πάντα; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 208, Rer. Div. Her. 36, Somn. 1, 241; Just., A I, 67, 2 τὸν ποιητὴν τῶν πάντων; PGM 1, 212 κύριε τῶν πάντων; 4, 3077) Ro 11:36 (Musaeus: Vorsokr. 2 A 4 [in Diog. L. 1, 3] ἐξ ἑνὸς τὰ πάντα γίνεσθαι καὶ εἰς ταὐτὸν ἀναλύεσθαι. Cp. Norden, Agn. Th. 240–50); 1 Cor 8:6ab; 15:28ab; Eph 3:9; 4:10b; Phil 3:21; Col 1:16ab, 17b (HHegermann, D. Vorstellung vom Schöpfungsmittler etc., TU 82, ’61, 88ff); Hb 1:3; 2:10ab; Rv 4:11; 1 Cl 34:2; PtK 2 (four times).—In the relative sense, indicated by the context, everything (Κυπρ. I p. 42 no. 29 τὰς στοὰς καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐταῖς πάντα; PGiss 2, 14 [II B.C.] in a bill: τὰ π.=everything taken together) ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται everything (=all the instruction) is in parables Mk 4:11. Cp. Ac 17:25b; Ro 8:32b. Of everything in heaven and earth that is in need of uniting and redeeming Eph 1:10 (EWalter, Christus u. d. Kosmos [Eph 1:10] ’48); Col 1:20. τὰ πάντα they all (of the members of the body) 1 Cor 12:19. The neut. is also used of persons: Gal 3:22; cp. 1 Ti 6:13 (here including humankind and everything else that possesses life).—As acc. of specification, almost like an adv.: τὰ πάντα in all respects (Appian, Prooem. 6 §23) Eph 4:15 (s. 1dβ).—As a summation of what precedes all this (PCairZen 741, 16; 742, 22; BGU 1509 [all III B.C.]) 2 Cor 4:15; Phil 3:8b; Col 3:8.—Furthermore, πάντες can also have the limited sense nearly all (Xenophon Eph. 2, 13, 4 πάντας ἀπέκτεινεν, ὀλίγους δὲ καὶ ζῶντας ἔλαβε. μόνος δὲ ὁ Ἱππόθοος ἠδυνήθη διαφυγεῖν).—Mlt-Turner 199–201.
    ⑤ everything belonging, in kind, to the class designated by the noun, every kind of, all sorts of, adj. for the words παντοδαπός and παντοῖος, which are lacking in our lit.: πᾶσα νόσος καὶ πᾶσα μαλακία Mt 4:23. γέμουσιν πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας they are full of all kinds of uncleanness 23:27 (Ar. 15, 6). πᾶσα ἐξουσία 28:18. ἀπὸ παντὸς ἔθνους from every kind of nation Ac 2:5. Cp. 7:22; 13:10ab; Ro 1:18, 29. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία (evil) desire of every kind 7:8. ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ καὶ πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5b. πᾶν ἁμάρτημα every kind of sin 6:18. Cp. 2 Cor 7:1; 9:8bc; 10:5ab; Eph 1:3, 8, 21a; 4:19; 5:3; Phil 1:9; 2 Th 2:17. πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν Tit 1:16; 3:1. Cp. 2:14; Hb 13:21. πᾶσα δόσις, πᾶν δώρημα Js 1:17 (W-S. §20, 11b). Cp. vs. 21; 1 Pt 2:1ab; Rv 8:7 al.—B. 919. Schmidt, Syn. IV, 540–54, s. ἕκαστος and ὅλος. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πᾶς

  • 12 ὅσος

    ὅσος, η, ον (Hom.+) correlative w. πόσος, τοσοῦτος (Jos., Ant. 1, 318)
    ① pert. to an extent of space or time that is of the same extent as another extent of the same order, as great, as far, as long
    ⓐ of space τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς (τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν), ὅσον τὸ πλάτος its length is as great as its breadth Rv 21:16.—ὅσον ὅσον a short distance (for ὅσον doubled s. Aristoph., Vesp. 213; Leonidas: Anth. Pal. 7, 472, 3; Hesych. 1421) Lk 5:3 D.
    ⓑ of time ἐφʼ ὅς. χρόνον as long as (UPZ 160, 12 [119 B.C.]) Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον (X., Cyr. 5, 5, 8; Polyaenus 4, 7, 10; UPZ 162 I, 23 [117 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 359) Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13. ὅς. χρόνον (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 25; Josh 4:14) Mk 2:19. ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον (B-D-F §304; Rob. 733; JWackernagel, Glotta 4, 1913, 244f; OLagercrantz, Eranos 18, 1918, 53ff) in a very little while Hb 10:37; 1 Cl 50:4 (both after Is 26:20).—ἐν ὅσῳ (Aristoph., Pax 943; Thu. 8, 87, 4) while Dg 8:10.
    ② pert. to a comparative quantity or number of objects or events; how much (many), as much (many) as (Aelian, VH 1, 4) ὅσον ἤθελον as much as they wanted J 6:11 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 11 §173 ὅσον ἐβούλετο; Just., A I, 45, 1 ὅσα βούλει ἐξέταζε).—W. πάντες (ἅπαντες) all who (Jos., Ant. 18, 370; Just., D. 11, 2) ἅπαντες ὅσοι all who Lk 4:40; J 10:8; Ac 3:24; 5:36f. πάντα ὅσα everything that (Job 1:12; GrBar 7:2; Philo, Op. M. 40; Jos., Ant. 10, 35) Mt 7:12; 13:46; 18:25; 28:20; Mk 6:30a; 11:24; 12:44; Lk 18:12, 22.—Even without πάντες/πάντα, ὅσοι/ὅσα has the mng. all that (Polyaenus 17, 15, 2; Jos., Ant. 12, 399; Just., D. 26, 1; 87, 4) οἱ πιστοὶ ὅσοι συνῆλθαν τῷ Πέτρῳ all the believers who came with Peter Ac 10:45. ἱμάτια ὅσα all the garments that 9:39. ὅσα κακὰ ἐποίησεν all the harm that he has done vs. 13. ὅσα εἶδες παράδοξα GJs 20:4. ὅσοι …, αὐτοῖς all who …, to them J 1:12. ὅσοι …, ἐπʼ αὐτούς Gal 6:16. ὅσοι …, οὗτοι all who …, (these) (Herm. Wr. 4, 4) Ro 8:14; Gal 6:12. ὅσα …, ταῦτα Phil 4:8 (for ὅσα repeated six times cp. Liban., Or. 20 p. 443, 1, where ὅσοι is repeated three times. Also Appian, Liby. 117 §554 ὅσα περιττὰ καὶ μάταια καὶ τρυφερὰ ἦν). W. οὗτοι preceding Hb 2:15.—Abs. ὅσοι (cp. Pla., Rep. 3, 415a) all those who Mt 14:36; Mk 3:10; Ac 4:6, 34; 13:48; Ro 2:12ab; 6:3 al. ὅσα everything that, whatever Mt 17:12; Mk 3:8; 5:19f; 9:13; 10:21; Lk 4:23; 8:39ab; Ac 14:27; 2 Ti 1:18 al. W. ἄν (ἐάν) making the expr. more general all those who, whoever, lit. as many as ever (pap, LXX) ὅσοι w. ind. foll. Mk 6:56; w. subjunctive foll. Mt 22:9; Lk 9:5; Ac 2:39. ὅσα ἐάν (PGM 12, 71 ὅσα ἐὰν θέλω; Mel., P. 35, 237 πάντα ὅσα ἐὰν γίνεται) Mt 18:18ab, or ἄν J 11:22. Likew. πάντα ὅσα ἐάν (or ἄν) w. subj. foll. Mt 7:12; 21:22; 23:3 (s. on this HGrimme, BZ 23, ’35, 171–79); Ac 3:22.
    ③ pert. to degree of correlative extent: ὅσον …, μᾶλλον περισσότερον as much as …, so much the more Mk 7:36; cp. Hs 9, 1, 8. ὅσον …, πλειόνως the more …, the more IEph 6:1. πλείονος …, καθʼ ὅσον πλείονα as much more … as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κατὰ τοσοῦτο to the degree that …, to the same degree 7:20, 22. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως just as …, so 9:27f. τοσούτῳ …, ὅσῳ (by) as much …, as 1:4. τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ all the more, as 10:25 (s. τοσοῦτος 5). τοσοῦτόν με ὠφελεῖν …, ὅσον Papias (2:4). Without τοσούτῳ to the degree that (Polyb. 4, 42, 5; Plut., Alex. M. 5, 5) Hb 8:6. ὅσα … τοσοῦτον to the degree that … to the same degree Rv 18:7. ὅσον as far as 19:8; D 12:2. On ἐφʼ ὅσον s. ἐπί 13 and 18cβ.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅσος

  • 13 γενεά

    γενεά, ᾶς, ἡ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, En; TestSol C 13:7; TestJob, Test12Patr; GrBar 10:3; Philo, Joseph., SibOr, Just., Tat.) a term relating to the product of the act of generating and with special ref. to kinship, frequently used of familial connections and ancestry. Gener. those descended fr. a common ancestor, a ‘clan’ (Pind., P. 10, 42 the Hyperboreans are a ἱερὰ γενεά; Diod S 18, 56, 7; Jos., Ant. 17, 220), then
    ① those exhibiting common characteristics or interests, race, kind gener. as in Lk 16:8 εἰς τὴν γ. τὴν ἑαυτῶν the people of the world are more prudent in relation to their own kind than are those who lay claim to the light (difft. GBeasley-Murray, A Commentary on Mk 13, ’57, 99–102).
    ② the sum total of those born at the same time, expanded to include all those living at a given time and freq. defined in terms of specific characteristics, generation, contemporaries (Hom. et al.; BGU 1211, 12 [II B.C.] ἕως γενεῶν τριῶν); Jesus looks upon the whole contemp. generation of Israel as a uniform mass confronting him ἡ γ. αὕτη (cp. Gen 7:1; Ps 11:8) Mt 11:16; 12:41f; 23:36; 24:34; Mk 13:30; Lk 7:31; 11:29–32, 50f; 17:25; 21:32 (EGraesser, ZNW Beih. 22,2 ’60). S. also 1 above. This generation is characterized as γ. ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη Mt 17:17; Mk 9:19 D; Lk 9:41; ἄπιστος Mk 9:19; πονηρά Mt 12:45; 16:4 D; Lk 11:29; πονηρὰ κ. μοιχαλίς Mt 12:39; 16:4; μοιχαλὶς καὶ ἁμαρτωλός Mk 8:38 (JGuillet, RSR 35, ’48, 275–81). Their contemporaries appeared to Christians as γ. σκολιὰ καὶ διεστραμμένη (the latter term as Mt 17:17; Mk 9:19 v.l.; Lk 9:41, the former Ac 2:40; cp. Ps 77:8) Phil 2:15 (Dt 32:5).—Cp. Wsd 3:19. A more favorable kind of γ. is mentioned in Ps 23:6; 111:2; 1QS 3:14.—The desert generation Hb 3:10 (Ps 94:10). ἰδίᾳ γ. ὑπηρετήσας after he had served his own generation Ac 13:36; γ. ἡμῶν 1 Cl 5:1; αἱ πρὸ ἡμῶν γ. 19:1; πρώτη γ. the first generation (of Christians) Hs 9, 15, 4 (Paus. 7, 4, 9 τετάρτῃ γενεᾷ=in the fourth generation).
    ③ the time of a generation, age (as a rule of thumb, the time between birth of parents and the birth of their children; since Hdt. 2, 142, 2; Dionys. Hal. 3, 15; Gen 50:23; Ex 13:18; 20:5; EpJer 2; Philo, Mos. 1, 7; Jos., Ant. 5, 336; SibOr 3, 108). Here the original sense gradually disappears, and the mng. ‘a period of time’ remains.
    ⓐ of periods of time defined in terms of a generation: age, generation Mt 1:17 (a similar list of numbers in Hellanicus [400 B.C.]: 323a, Fgm. 22a Jac. ἐννέα γενεαῖς ὕστερον … ἓξ γενεαῖς ὕστερον … τρισὶ γενεαῖς ὕστερον; Just., D. 92, 5 γενεαὶ ἀνθρώπων; Tat. 41, 1 μιᾷ τῶν Τρωϊκῶν προγενέστερος … γενεᾷ [of Heracles]); Lk 1:48; 1 Cl 50:3; ἐν γενεᾷ καὶ γ. (Ps 44:18; 89:1) in one generation after the other 7:5.
    ⓑ of an undefined time period period of time gener. εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γενεάς (Ps 48:12; 88:2 al.; Just., D. 92, 2 μετὰ τοσαύτας γ.) to all ages Lk 1:50 (v.l. εἰς γενεὰς γενεῶν and εἰς γενεὰν καὶ γενεάν); cp. 1 Cl 61:3; εἰς πάσας τὰς γ. (Ex 12:14) to all generations Eph 3:21; ἀπὸ τῶν γ. from earliest times Col 1:26 (for the combination αἰῶνες and γενεαί cp. Tob 1:4; 8:5 S; 13:12; Esth 10:3k). ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων fr. ancient times Ac 15:21 (cp. Sir 2:10); ἀπὸ γενεᾶς εἰς γ. (Ex 17:16; Ps 9:27) fr. generation to g. Lk 1:50 v.l.; MPol 21; ἐν πάσαις ταῖς γ. in all generations 1 Cl 60:1; GJs 6:2; 7:2; cp. 1 Cl 11:2; ἐν πάσαις ταῖς γενεαῖς τῆς γῆς GJs 12:1 (TestJob 4:6); ἑτέραις γ. at other times Eph 3:5 (cp. Jo 1:3; Ps 47:14); ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γ. in past ages Ac 14:16.
    ④ in the quot. fr. Is 53:8 τὴν γ. αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεταὶ Ac 8:33; 1 Cl 16:8 γ. is prob. to be taken in the sense of family history.—MMeinertz, ‘Dieses Geschlecht’ im NT, BZ n.F. 1, ’57, 283–89.—DELG s.v. γίγνομαι p. 222. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γενεά

  • 14 πνεῦμα

    πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).
    ① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)
    ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).
    ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).
    ② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.
    ③ a part of human personality, spirit
    ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.
    ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).
    ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.
    ④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).
    ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).
    ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.
    ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.
    ⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.
    ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.
    ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.
    ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).
    β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.
    ⓓ abs.
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).
    β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.
    ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.
    ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.
    ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.
    α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.
    β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.
    γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).
    δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.
    ⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).
    ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.
    ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).
    ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.
    ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.
    ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.
    ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.
    ⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.
    ⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα

  • 15 γάρ

    γάρ (Hom.+) conj. used to express cause, clarification, or inference. Never comes first in its clause; usu. second, but also third (Hb 11:32), or even fourth (2 Cor 1:19, as e.g. Menand., Epitr. 883 S. [=563 Kö.]; Lucian, Pisc. 10, Philops. 15; s. B-D-F §452; 475, 2; Denniston 56–114; Schwyzer II 560).
    ① marker of cause or reason, for
    ⓐ abs. Mk 1:22; 9:49; Lk 1:15; 21:4; J 2:25; Ac 2:25; Ro 1:9; 1 Cor 11:5 and oft.—It should be noted that γάρ w. a verb (and nothing else) can form a sentence (Demosth. 21, 28 δίδωσι γάρ.; Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 32 κινεῖ γάρ.; Menand., Sam. 666 S. [=321 Kö.] δεῖ γάρ.; Alexis Com. 286 Kock παύσει γάρ.; Axionicus Com. [IV B.C.] 6, 6 K.: Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 273 D.; Maximus Tyr. 10, 8g δύναται γάρ.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 3, 3; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 163d ἠνεχυρίαστο γάρ.=for it had been seized as security; Aristaen., Ep. 2, 7; Anna Comn., Alexias 5, 1 vol. I p. 156, 8 R. προπέποτο γάρ.; et al.—Ps.-Demetrius, Form. Ep. p. 12, 2 as conclusion of a letter ὀφείλω γάρ.; Vi. Aesopi G 67 P. as the ending of a story: οὐκ ἔχεις γάρ.=you don’t have any [understanding, common sense]; Polyaenus 3 the introduction ends with the words: πρόδηλον γάρ.—See also CKraeling, JBL 44, 1925, 357f; RRottley, JTS 27, 1926, 407–9; RLightfoot, Locality and Doctrine in the Gosp. ’38, 10ff; CMoule, NTS 2, ’55/56, 58f) ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ. Mk 16:8 (s. φοβέω 1a). Conclusions of this kind at the end of Mk are also found in other lit. (Horapollo 2, 80 οὗτος γάρ; Plotin. V 5, 13, 36f κρείττον γὰρ τὸ ποιοῦν τοῦ ποιούμενου• τελειότερον γάρ. [Pvan der Horst, JTS n.s. 23, ’72, 121–24]).
    ⓑ used w. other particles and conjunctions ἰδοὺ γάρ (Jdth 5:23; 9:7; 12:12; 1 Macc 9:45) Lk 1:44, 48; 2:10; 6:23; 17:21; Ac 9:11; 2 Cor 7:11 al.; s. ἰδού 1c. καὶ γάρ (B-D-F §452, 3; B-D-R §452, 3) for (=Lat. etenim, Kühner-G. II 338; s. Chariton 3, 3, 16; 2 Macc 1:19; 4 Macc 1:2; 5:8) Mk 10:45; Lk 22:37; J 4:23; Ac 19:40; 1 Cor 5:7; Hb 5:12; 12:29; Hs 9, 8, 2; for also, for even (B-D-F §452, 3; ZNW 19, 1920, 175f) Mt 8:9; Lk 6:32f; 7:8; 11:4; J 4:45; Ro 11:1; 15:3; 16:2; 2 Cor 2:10. S. FGrosheide, καὶ γάρ in het NT: TSt 33, 1915, 108–10. γὰρ καί for also, for precisely 2 Cor 2:9 (ParJer 7:6 εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ἀπεστάλην). τε γάρ for indeed (X., Mem. 1, 1, 3) Ro 1:26; 7:7; Hb 2:11 (s. τέ 2b). μὲν γάρ (3 Macc 2:15f) often followed by δέ, ἀλλά Ac 13:36; 23:8; 28:22; 2 Cor 9:1; 11:4; Hb 7:20; 12:10 (s. μέν 1aα, β); ὅτι μὲν γὰρ … ἀλλά Ac 4:16. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 1 Cor 11:9; οὐ γάρ Mt 10:20; Mk 4:22; 6:52; J 3:17; Ac 2:34; Ro 1:16; 2:11, 13, 28; 4:13; 1 Cor 1:17; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 4:30 and oft. μὴ γάρ Js 1:7 (TestAbr A 2, 79, 9 [Stone p. 6]; GrBar 6:6). οὐδὲ γάρ Lk 20:36; J 5:22; 7:5; 8:42; Ro 8:7; Gal 1:12 (s. οὐδέ 2). οὔτε γὰρ … οὔτε (Wsd 12:13; Sir 30:19) for neither … nor 1 Th 2:5.
    ⓒ γάρ is somet. repeated. It occurs twice either to introduce several arguments for the same assertion, as (Sir 37:13f; 38:1f; Wsd 7:16f) J 8:42; 1 Cor 16:7; 2 Cor 11:19f; or to have one clause confirm the other, as (Jdth 5:23; 7:27; 1 Macc 11:10) Mt 10:19f; Lk 8:29; J 5:21f, 46; Ac 2:15; Ro 6:14; 8:2f; Hv 5:3; or to have various assertions of one and the same sentence confirmed one after the other Mt 3:2f; J 3:19f (cp. Wsd 1:5f; EpJer 6; 7). γάρ also occurs three times (Wsd 9:13–15; 14:27–29) Mt 16:25–27; Lk 9:24–26; Ro 4:13–15; 2 Cor 3:9–11; four times Mk 8:35–38; Ro 1:16–18; even five times 1 Cor 9:15–17.
    ⓓ the general is confirmed by the specific Mk 7:10; Lk 12:52; Ro 7:2; 1 Cor 12:8; —the specific by the general Mt 7:8; 13:12; 22:14; Mk 4:22, 25; Ro 2:2 v.l.
    ⓔ oft. the thought to be supported is not expressed, but must be supplied fr. the context: (He has truly been born) for we have seen his star Mt 2:2. (Let no one refuse) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ Mk 8:35; Lk 9:24. (Let no disciple fail to testify) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με Mk 8:38. This is common; cp. Ac 13:36; 21:13; 22:26; Ro 8:18; 14:10; 1 Cor 1:18; 5:3; 9:9, 17; 14:9. Sim. w. other particles καὶ γάρ Mt 15:27; 2 Cor 5:2; 13:4; Phil 2:27; 1 Th 3:4; 4:10. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 2 Cor 3:10. μὲν γάρ Ro 2:25; 1 Cor 5:3; 11:7; 2 Cor 9:1; Hb 7:18. οὐ γάρ Mt 9:13; Mk 9:6; Lk 6:43f; Ac 4:20; Ro 8:15; 2 Cor 1:13 (also s. καί 2iα, and μέν 1aα).
    ⓕ oft. in questions, where the English idiom leaves the word untransl., adds then, pray, or prefixes what! or why! to the question (Hyperid., Fgm. 219; Ael. Aristid. 47, 27 K.=23 p. 452 D.; TestJob 23:8 τὶ γὰρ μοι ἡ θρίξ … ; Jos., Bell. 1, 589, Ant. 9, 92) ἱνατί γὰρ … κρίνεται for what reason … should be judged 1 Cor 10:29. ποῖον γὰρ κλέος; what credit is there? 1 Pt 2:20. μὴ γὰρ … ἔρχεται; what! Is the Messiah to hail fr. Galilee? J 7:41. μὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε; what! Have you no houses? 1 Cor 11:22. S. μή 3a.—ποία γὰρ ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν; what, pray, is your life? Js 4:14 v.l. πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; how in the world can I? Ac 8:31.—Esp. τίς γάρ; τί γάρ; in direct questions: Mt 9:5; 16:26; 23:17, 19 al. τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν; why, what crime has he committed? 27:23; sim. Mk 15:14; Lk 23:22. τί γάρ; transitional, well, then Ro 3:3; what does it matter? Phil 1:18.
    ② marker of clarification, for, you see (Dionys. Hal., De Isocr. p. 542 Raderm.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 9 p. 373 κοῦφα γὰρ ὄντα; BGU 830, 20 ἐπεὶ γὰρ καὶ γείτων αὐτοῦ εἰμί=since I am also, as you see, his neighbor; Ps.-Demetr. 153 p. 35, 16 R.; Ps.-Callisth. 3, 2, 2 ἐγὼ γάρ=for I) Mt 12:40, 50; 23:3; 24:38; Mk 7:3; Lk 8:40; 9:14; J 3:16; 4:8f; Ro 7:2; Hb 2:8; 3:4; 2 Pt 2:8; AcPlCor 2, 4; 35.—Brief, explanatory parenthetical clauses (En 107:3 μυστηριακῶς γὰρ ἐδήλωσεν αὐτῷ; Diod S 13, 66, 6 ἦν γὰρ ὁ Κλέαρχος χαλεπός) Mt 4:18; Mk 1:16; 2:15; 5:42; 16:4; Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 16:5; Gal. 4:25 v.l. (cp. γὰρ δή 1 Cl 42:5). Akin to explanatory function is the use of γάρ as a narrative marker to express continuation or connection (in later Gk. writers, where more recent users of the texts, not finding the causal force they expect, would often prefer to see it replaced by δέ; unnecessarily, since the grammarian Trypho Alex. [I B.C.], Fgm. 54 ed. AvVelsen 1853 shows clearly that γάρ under certain circumstances εἷς οὖν ἐστὶν ἀντὶ τοῦ δέ=is one and the same thing as δέ). Indeed, in many instances γάρ appears to be used adverbially like our ‘now’ (in which the temporal sense gives way to signal an important point or transition), ‘well, then’, ‘you see’ (e.g. Diod S 20, 35, 1 ‘now’; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. §1; 120; 158; 197 [LDeubner, Bemerkungen z. Text der Vi. Pyth. des Jambl.’35, 30f]; Arrian, Ind. 33, 1 ἀλλὰ ἔπλωον γὰρ … =well, then, they sailed … ; schol. on Od. 4, 22 p. 174, 10 Dind.; ‘moreover’ SIG 1109, 28 [II A.D.]; ‘in the first place’ Jos., Bell. 7, 43, ‘now’ Ant. 1, 68): Ro 1:18; 2:25 (‘indeed’, ‘to be sure’ as Jos., Ant. 11, 8); 4:3, 9; 5:7 (‘but’); 12:3; 14:5; 1 Cor 10:1 (v.l. δέ); 2 Cor 1:12; 10:12; 11:5 (B δέ); Gal 1:11 (v.l. δέ); 5:13; 1 Ti 2:5. Cp. ἡμεῖς γὰρ J 9:28 v.l.—Confirming (Arrian, Ind. 22, 6 ἀλλὰ ἐκπεριπλῶσαι γὰρ … μέγα ἔργον ἐφαίνετο=but to sail seaward seemed indeed a dangerous undertaking; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 192 ἅπασαι μὲν γὰρ … =What has just been stated is apparent from the fact that all …). Especially in replies γάρ confirms what has been asked about (B-D-F §452, 2) yes, indeed; certainly 1 Th 2:20; 1 Cor 9:10.
    ③ marker of inference, certainly, by all means, so, then. In self-evident conclusions, esp. in exclamations, strong affirmations, etc. (Diogenes the Cynic in Diog. L. 6, 47 παῦσαι γάρ=stop, then) μὴ γὰρ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος not for a moment let such a person think Js 1:7; μὴ γάρ τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω by no means let any of you suffer 1 Pt 4:15; ἀναλογίσασθε γὰρ τὸν … ὑπομεμενηκότα yes indeed, consider him who endured Hb 12:3; οὐ γάρ no, indeed! Ac 16:37 (Aristoph., Nub. 232, Ran. 58; Pla., Rep. 492e; Lucian, Jupp. Conf. 16). In weakened sense it is somet. resumptive, esp. in long periodic sentences: ηὐδόκησαν γάρ they decided, then Ro 15:27. ἐλεύθερος γὰρ ὤν though I am free, then 1 Cor 9:19 (cp. vs. 1). Sim. 2 Cor 5:4. Many questions w. γάρ have both inferential and causal force.—S. τοιγαροῦν.—CBird, Some γάρ Clauses in St Mark’s Gospel: JTS n.s. 4, ’53, 171–87.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γάρ

  • 16 εἰ

    1
    εἰ (Hom.+)
    ① marker of a condition, existing in fact or hypothetical, if (B-D-F §371f, neg. §428, 1; 2; Rob., indexes; JBoyer, Grace Theological Journal 2, ’81, 75–141, marker of a ‘simple, logical connection between protasis and apodosis’).
    ⓐ w. the indic.
    α. in all tenses, to express a condition thought of as real or to denote assumptions relating to what has already happened εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ if you really are the Son of God Mt 4:3; sim. 5:29f; 6:23; 8:31; Ac 5:39. εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ if you call yourself a Judean Ro 2:17. εἰ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ βαστάζεις if you do boast, (remember) you do not support 11:18 al. In Paul the verb is freq. missing, and is to be supplied fr. the context: εἰ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν (sc. ἐστιν), τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρόν (sc. ἐστιν) 8:10. εἰ τέκνα (sc. ἐστέ) if you are children, then … vs. 17, εἰ χάριτι (γέγονεν), οὐκέτι ἐξ ἔργων 11:6 al. The negative in clauses where the reality of the condition is taken for granted is οὐ (earlier Gk. μή [for exception s. Goodwin p. 138f]; s. B-D-F §428, 1): εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν Mt 26:42. εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε Mk 11:25 [26] v.l. εἰ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε Lk 16:11f; εἰ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν vs. 31. εἰ οὐ φοβοῦμαι Lk 18:4; cp. J 5:47; 10:37; Ro 8:9; 11:21; 1 Cor 7:9; 9:2; 11:6; 15:13ff, 29, 32; 16:22 al. εἰ is rarely found w. the future εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται Mt 26:33; Mk 14:29; εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 2 Ti 2:12 (cp. Just., A I, 31, 6 εἰ μὴ ἀρνοῖντο Ἰησοῦν); εἰ ὑπομενεῖτε 1 Pt 2:20; εἰ καὶ οὐ δώσει (class. ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δῷ B-D-F §372, 3; Rob. 1012) Lk 11:8. W. aor., when events are regarded as having taken place Mt 24:22; Mk 3:26; 13:20.
    β. w. the pres., impf., aor., or plpf. indic. to express an unreal (contrary to fact) condition (B-D-F §360; 372; Rob. 1012ff). ἄν is usu. found in the apodosis (regularly in class.) εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σίδωνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν μετενόησαν if the wonders had been done in T. and S., they would have repented long ago Mt 11:21. εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers 23:30. εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης if the master of the house had known 24:43 (cp. Just., A I, 12, 2 εἰ … ταῦτα ἐγίνωσκον; 18, 1 al.) εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would know Lk 7:39 al. The pres. indic. εἰ ἔχετε (v.l. εἴχετε) πίστιν … ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith … you would say Lk 17:6. Somet. ἄν is lacking in the apodosis (Polyaenus 2, 3, 5 εἰ ἐπεποιήκειμεν … νῦν ἐχρῆν=if we had done … it would have been necessary; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 16, 18 [II B.C.]; PRein I, 7 [II B.C.]; POxy 526, 10; 530, 8 and 17; Just., A I, 10, 6; 11:2 al.—PMelcher, De sermone Epict., diss. Halle 1905, 75; Mlt. 200f) εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο if this man were not from God, he would not have been able to … J 9:33. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν if I had not come, they would not have sin 15:22; cp. vs. 24. W. the apodosis placed first Mk 9:42 (v.l. περιέκειτο), Lk 17:2; J 19:11.
    ⓑ εἰ w. subj., as καὶ εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 (s. 7 below), is unusual, perh. a textual error; B-D-F §372, 3 conjectures κἄν for καὶ εἰ. But εἰ w. subj. is found in the older poets and Hdt. (Kühner-G. II 474), in Aristoph., Equ. 698 et al., in var. dialects (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I 1912, 277f) and in later times (e.g. Epict., Vett. Val., Lucian [ed. CJacobitz, Index graec. 473a]; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. p. 84, 28; 197, 9; ins [Rdm.2 199]; PRyl 234, 12; POxy 496, 11; Dt 8:5); B-D-F §372, 3; Mlt. 187; Reinhold 107; OSchulthess, AKaegi Festschr. 1919, 161f.
    ⓒ εἰ w. the optative is rare: εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε … μακάριοι even if you should suffer, … you would be blessed 1 Pt 3:14. εἰ θέλοι (v.l. θέλει) τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ if it should be God’s will vs. 17. εἴ τι ἔχοιεν (sc. κατηγορεῖν; cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 εἰ … μηδὲν ἔχοι τις ἐλέγχειν) πρὸς ἐμέ if they should have any charges to bring against me Ac 24:19. εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη (Jos., Ant. 12, 12) if it should be possible 20:16 (but s. B-D-F §385, 2; Just., A II, 15, 2 εἰ δύναιντο). εἰ τύχοι is used as a formula (oft. in later wr., incl. Philo; s. KReik, D. Opt. bei Polyb. u. Philo 1907, 154; Just., A I, 27, 3) it may be, for example, perhaps 1 Cor 15:37; used to tone down an assertion which may be too bold 14:10 (Lucian, Icar. 6 καὶ πολλάκις, εἰ τύχοι, μηδὲ ὁπόσοι στάδιοι Μεγαρόθεν Ἀθήναζέ εἰσιν, ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι ‘and many times, so it appears, not even knowing how many stades it is from Megara to Athens’).
    ② marker of an indirect question as content, that (Kühner-G. II 369, 8; Rob. 965. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 67 §283 ἀγανακτέω εἰ=be exasperated that; Sir 23:14 θελήσεις εἰ μὴ ἐγεννήθης; 2 Macc 14:28; 4 Macc 2:1; 4:7. S. on θαυμάζω 1aγ) ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν he was surprised that he was already dead Mk 15:44a. μὴ θαυμάζετε εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος do not wonder that the world hates you 1J 3:13; θαυμαζόντων …, εἰ τοσαύτη σπουδὴ ἦν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι that there was such interest in arresting MPol 7:2; AcPlCor 2:2 (cp. Just., A II, 8, 3 οὐδὲν … θαυμαστόν, εἰ). Sim. also (Procop. Soph., Ep. 123 χάριν ἔχειν εἰ=that) μαρτυρόμενος … εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός testifying … that the Christ was to suffer (s. πάσχω 3aα) Ac 26:23.—οὐ μέγα εἰ it is not surprising that 2 Cor 11:15 (cp. Aeschin., In Ctes. 94 ἐστὶ δεινὸν εἰ; Diod S 23, 15, 5, παράδοξον … εἰ=incredible … that; ibid. θαυμαστὸν εἰ; Gen 45:28 μέγα μοί ἐστιν εἰ).— That is also poss. after verbs of knowing or not knowing, e.g. J 9:25; Ac 19:2b; 1 Cor 1:16; 7:16; so CBurchard, ZNW 52, ’61, 73–82 but s. 5bα.
    ③ marker in causal clauses, when an actual case is taken as a supposition, where we also can use if instead of since: εἰ τὸν χόρτον … ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν if God so clothes the grass Mt 6:30; Lk 12:28; cp. Mt 7:11; Lk 11:13; J 7:23; 10:35; 13:14, 17, 32; Ac 4:9; 11:17; Ro 6:8; 15:27; Col 2:20; Hb 7:15; 1 Pt 1:17; 1J 4:11.
    ④ marker of strong or solemn assertion, without apodosis (=in aposiopesis; B-D-F §482; Rob. 1203) εἰ ἔγνως if you only knew Lk 19:42. εἰ βούλει παρενέγκαι if you would only let (this) pass 22:42 v.l. (cp. the letter fr. IV B.C. in Dssm., LO 120, note 5 [LAE 149]).—Hebraistic in oaths, like אִם: may this or that happen to me, if … (cp. 2 Km 3:25; GBuchanan, HTR 58, ’65, 319–24); this amounts to a strong negation certainly not (cp. Ps 7:4f; Gen 14:23) ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν εἰ δοθήσεται truly, I tell you, it will not be given Mk 8:12 (NColeman, JTS 28, 1927, 159–67 interprets this as strongly positive; against him FBurkitt, ibid. 274–76). εἰ εἰσελεύσονται they shall certainly not enter Hb 3:11; 4:3, 5 (all 3 Ps 94:11); B-D-F §372, 4; 454, 5; Mlt-H. 468f; Rob. 94; 1024.
    ⑤ marker of direct and indirect questions (without particle following)
    ⓐ (not in earlier Gk., B-D-F §440, 3; Rob. 916) w. direct questions (Gen 17:17; 44:19; Am 3:3–6; 6:12; TestAbr A 15 p.96, 8 [Stone p. 40]; 18 p. 100, 13 [St. p. 48]): εἰ ἔξεστιν; is it permitted, may one? Mt 12:10; 19:3 (cp. Mk 10:2); Lk 14:3 v.l.; Ac 21:37; 22:25. εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; are there only a few who will be saved? Lk 13:23; cp. Mk 8:23; Lk 22:49; Ac 1:6; 7:1; 19:2a. Cp. 6aβ.
    ⓑ freq. in indir. questions whether (Hom. et al.)
    α. w. pres. indic. (Gen 27:21; 42:16; TestJob 31:1; Jos., Ant. 10, 259; 16, 225; Ar 8, 1; Just., A I, 2, 2; A II, 2, 10) εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός whether you are the Christ Mt 26:63. εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν whether he is a sinner J 9:25; εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν whether there is a holy spirit Ac 19:2b (s. 2 above). ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται Mt 27:49; Mk 15:36 (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 20, 3 φέρʼ ἴδω εἰ=let me see whether, Merc. Cond. 6); cp. Mk 10:2; Lk 14:31; 1 Cor 3:12; 2 Cor 13:5; 1J 4:1.—W. the fut. indic. (4 Km 1:2; Job 5:1) εἰ θεραπεύσει αὐτόν whether he would heal him Mk 3:2 (v.l. θεραπεύει); Lk 6:7 v.l.; εἰ σώσεις whether you will save 1 Cor 7:16.—W. the aor. indic. (Esth 4:14; w. plpf. Just., D. 56, 2) εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν whether he had already died Mk 15:44b; εἰ ἐβάπτισα 1 Cor 1:16.
    β. w. subj. διώκω εἰ καταλάβω I press on (to see) whether I can capture Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §368; 375; Rob. 1017).
    γ. w. opt. (X., An. 1, 8, 15; 2, 1, 15; 4 Macc 9:27; 11:13) ἀνακρίνοντες … εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα examining … to see whether this was really so Ac 17:11. εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι 25:20; cp. 17:27.
    ⑥ In combination w. other particles, w. the other particles foll.
    ⓐ εἰ ἄρα
    α. expressing possibility if, indeed; if, in fact; whether (perhaps) (X., An. 3, 2, 22; SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; AcPt Ox 849, 6.
    β. introducing a direct question εἰ ἄρα ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; is it (really) so? Ac 7:1 v.l.; indirect qu. on the chance that (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9 ‘should you find it impossible’; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; in the hope that 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); AcPt Ox 849, 2; 22. Cp. εἰ δέ … ; What if …? Ac 23:9.
    ⓑ εἴ γε if indeed, inasmuch as (Kühner-G. II 177c) Eph 3:2; 4:21; Col 1:23. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ; εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ have you experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain Gal 3:4. εἴ γε καὶ ἐκδυσάμενοι οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα assuming, of course, that having put it off we shall not be found naked 2 Cor 5:3. [εἴ γ]ε οὕτως ὡς [ἔστιν καὶ παρελάβετε τὸν λόγον] AcPl BMM recto, 31f (restoration based on duplicate Ox 1602 verso, 37f and AcPl Ha 8, 24f, which has a slightly difft. text after εἴ γε [s. also the text of Ghent 62, 17 in HSanders, HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2]). S. γέ bα.
    ⓒ εἰ δὲ καί (Just., D. 110, 1) but if, and if Lk 11:18; 1 Cor 4:7; and even if 2 Cor 4:3 (but s. Lietzmann, Hdb.); 11:6. If, on the other hand, … then AcPlCor 2:28 (εἰ … δέ … καί … μή).
    ⓓ εἰ δὲ μή (γε) if not, otherwise
    α. after affirmat. clauses, w. the aor. ind, and ἄν in the apodosis J 14:2; or pres. ind. (Demosth., Prooem. 29, 3) and fut. (Gen 30:1; Bel 29 Theod.; PLond 1912, 98) Rv 2:5, 16; or pres. impv. J 14:11.—εἰ δὲ μή γε (μήγε some edd.) otherwise (Pla. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 27; Jos., Bell. 6, 120, Ant. 17, 113; Just., D. 105, 6; IGR IV, 833; POxy 1159, 6; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 167, 25; PGM 4, 2629; Da 3:15; Bel 8; TestSol 13:3 P): εἰ δὲ μή γε (sc. προσέχετε), μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε otherwise you have no reward Mt 6:1; cp. Lk 10:6. Elliptically: κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον• εἰ δὲ μή γε, ἐκκόψεις αὐτήν who knows, it may bear fruit next year; if not, fine, then cut it down (= have it cut down) 13:9.
    β. after negat. clauses, otherwise (X., An. 7, 1, 8; Diod S 3, 47, 4; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 100; LBW 1651 μὴ ἀδικεῖν…, εἰ δὲ μή; UPZ 196 I, 33 [119 B.C.]; Job 32:22) Mk 2:21f.—After a negative statement: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς. εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται people do not pour new wine into old skins; otherwise they burst Mt 9:17; cp. Lk 5:36. μή τίς με δόξῃ ἄφρονα εἶναι• εἰ δὲ μή γε, κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέχασθέ με no one is to consider me foolish; otherwise at least accept me as a fool 2 Cor 11:16.
    ⓔ εἰ καί even if, even though, although Lk 11:8; 18:4; 1 Cor 7:21; 2 Cor 4:16; 7:8; 12:11; Phil 2:17; Col 2:5; Hb 6:9; AcPlCor 2:32.
    ⓕ εἰ μὲν γάρ for if Ac 25:11 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν); 2 Cor 11:4; Hb 8:4 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν).
    ⓖ εἰ μὲν οὖν if, then Hb 7:11. W. εἰ δέ foll. (X., Cyr. 8, 7, 22; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.) Ac 19:38.
    ⓗ εἰ μέντοι if, on the other hand Js 2:8.
    ⓘ εἰ μή (=πλήν) but 1 Cor 7:17 (= in general) (B-D-F §376).—After negatives
    α. except, if not, mostly without a verb depending on εἰ μή (X., An. 2, 1, 12; JosAs 12:11; Just., A I, 29, 1) Mt 11:27; 12:24; 16:4; J 3:13; Ro 7:7; Gal 1:19 (HKoch, Z. Jakobusfrage Gal 1:19: ZNW 33, ’34, 204–9); but also with a verb (Jos., Ant. 8, 316) Mt 5:13; Mk 6:5; Ac 21:25 v.l.
    β. but (OGI 201, 20f οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἔξω; in note 33 the ed. gives exx. fr. Aristoph. for this use) without a verb Mt 12:4; w. a verb (Theod. Prodr. 7, 426 H.) Gal 1:7, s. ἄλλος 2b. For ἐκτὸς εἰ μή s. ἐκτός 3a.
    ⓙ εἰ μήτι unless indeed, unless perhaps (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 198 D.; Jos., Ant. 4, 280; Tat. 10, 2) Lk 9:13; 2 Cor 13:5; w. ἄν (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 4) 1 Cor 7:5 (s. Dssm., NB 32, 1 [BS 204 n.]; B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169; 239; Reinhold 35; JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attic. imitatore 1911, 56; JWackernagel, Antike Anredeformen 1912, 27f).
    ⓚ εἰ οὖν if, therefore Mt 6:23; Lk 11:36; 12:26; J 13:14; 18:8; Col 3:1; Phlm 17.
    ⓛ εἴπερ if indeed, if after all, since (X., An. 1, 7, 9; Menand., Epitr. 907 S. [587 Kö.]; PHal 7, 6; UPZ 59, 29 [168 B.C.]; Jdth 6:9; TestJob 3:6; Just., Tat., Ath.) Ro 3:30 (ἐπείπερ v.l.); 8:9, 17; 2 Th 1:6.—if indeed, provided that εἴπερ ἄρα (ἄρα 1a) 1 Cor 15:15. καὶ γὰρ εἴπερ for even if (cp. Od. 1, 167; B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 8:5; on 2 Cor 5:3 s. εἴ γε καί 6b above. Doubtful IEph 6:2; s. ἤ 2aβ.
    ⓜ if perchance, if haply εἰ δέ που … τις ἔλθοι if perchance … anyone came Papias (2:4).
    ⓝ εἴ πως (the spelling εἴπως is also correct; B-D-F §12) if perhaps, if somehow
    α. w. opt. (X., An. 2, 5, 2; 4, 1, 21; POxy 939, 15) εἴ πως δύναιντο παραχειμάσαι in the hope that they could spend the winter Ac 27:12.
    β. w. fut. indic. (3 Km 21:31; 4 Km 19:4; Jer 28:8; TestJos 6:6) εἴ πως εὐοδωθήσομαι whether, perhaps, I shall succeed Ro 1:10; cp. 11:14; Phil 3:11.
    ⓞ εἴτε … εἴτε (Soph. et al.; ins since 416 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw.]; pap [Mayser II/3, 159]; LXX; JosAs 5:9; ApcrEzk [Epiph 70, 11]; Jos., Ant. 16, 33 and 37; Just., Ath. B-D-F §446; 454, 3; Rob. ind.) if … (or) if, whether … or
    α. w. a verb in pres. indic. (Herm. Wr. 12, 22 thrice) 1 Cor 12:26; 2 Cor 1:6; or pres. subj. 1 Th 5:10.
    β. w. no verb (Just., D. 86, 3 al.) Ro 12:6–8; 1 Cor 3:22; 8:5; 2 Cor 5:10 al. εἴτε only once 1 Cor 14:27. εἴτε ἄρσενα εἴτε θήλειαν (ἤτε … ἤτε pap) GJs 4:1.
    ⑦ Used w. the indef. pron.: εἴ τις, εἴ τι everyone who or whoever; everything that or whatever Mt 16:24; 18:28; Mk 4:23; 9:35; Lk 9:23; 14:26; 1 Ti 3:1, 5; 5:4, 8, 16 al. Cp. 1 Cor 12:31 v.l. (ADebrunner, ConNeot XI, ’47, 37). W. subj. εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 s. 1b, above.—DELG. M-M.
    2
    εἰ μήν, more correctly εἶ μήν (B-D-F §24; Rob. 1150) for the older ἦ μήν (Hom. et al. [s. Denniston 350f], but found also Jos., Ant. 13, 76; 17, 42), in Hellenistic-Roman times (SIG 993, 20 [III B.C.]; 736, 27 [92 B.C.]; IG IV, 840, 15 [EHermann, Gr. Forschungen I 1912, 312]; pap since 112 B.C. [Mayser 78]; LXX e.g. Ezk 33:27; 34:8 al.; Num 14:28; Jdth 1:12; Bar 2:29 [Thackeray 83]) formula used in oaths surely, certainly Hb 6:14 (Gen 22:17).—Dssm., NB 33ff (BS 205ff).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰ

  • 17 πιστεύω

    πιστεύω (Trag.+) impf. ἐπίστευον; 1 aor. ἐπίστευσα; pf. πεπίστευκα; plpf. πεπιστεύκειν Ac 14:23 (on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Pass.: fut. 3 pl. πιστευθήσονται Gen 42, 20; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; pf. πεπίστευμαι (the word does not occur in Phlm, 2 Pt, 2 and 3J, Rv, MPol, or D. But it is a special favorite of J and 1J, where it is found 96 times and 9 times respectively; πίστις is not found in the gospel at all, and occurs in 1J only once, 5:4. Our lit. uses it quite predominantly in a transcendent sense, or at least w. transcendent coloring).
    ① to consider someth. to be true and therefore worthy of one’s trust, believe
    ⓐ believe (in) someth., be convinced of someth., w. that which one believes (in) indicated
    α. by acc. of thing (Soph., Oed. Rex 646 τάδε; Aristot., Analyt. Pr. 2, 23, 68b, 13 ἅπαντα; PSI 494, 14 μηθέν; UPZ 70, 29 [152/151 B.C.] π. τὰ ἐνύπνια; ApcEsdr 7:12 p. 32, 26 τὸ βιβλίον τοῦτο) ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα πιστεύει 1 Cor 13:7. πεπιστεύκαμεν τὴν ἀγάπην we believe in the love 1J 4:16. πιστεύεις τοῦτο; J 11:26b. Cp. Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5). Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν our testimony was believed 2 Th 1:10b (cp. Aristot., EN 10, 2 p. 1172b, 15 ἐπιστεύοντο οἱ λόγοι; Gen 42:20).
    β. by means of a ὅτι-clause believe that (Plut., Mor. 210d; Aelian, VH 1, 16 p. 8, 9; Herm. Wr. 4, 4: Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24; PLond III, 897, 12 p. 207 [I A.D.]; Tob 10:8 S; Job 9:16; 15:31; 39:12; La 4:12; 4 Macc 7:19; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 18 [Stone p. 48]; ParJer 6:7; Just., A I, 18, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 16) μακαρία ἡ πιστεύσασα ὅτι ἔσται τελείωσις Lk 1:45 (ὅτι here may=for: s. ὅτι 4b).—Mk 11:23; cp. vs. 24; J 8:24 (ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι as Is 43:10); 11:27, 42; 13:19; 14:10; 16:27, 30; 17:8, 21; 20:31a; Ac 9:26; Ro 6:8; 10:9; 1 Th 4:14; Hb 11:6; Js 2:19a; 1J 5:1, 5; Hv 3, 8, 4; 4, 2, 4; m 1:1; 6, 2, 10b; Hs 2:5.—[ὅτι εἷς θεός] καὶ εἷς χριστός AcPl Ha 1, 17; AcPlCor 1:8. π. περί τινος ὅτι believe concerning someone that J 9:18 (M. Ant. 1, 15, 5 πιστεύειν περὶ ὧν λέγοι ὅτι οὕτως φρονεῖ=believe concerning whatever he might say, that it was what he actually thought; Just., D. 10, 1 π. ἡμῶν• ὅτι ἐσθίομεν ἀνθρώπους.—π. περί τινος as Plut., Lyc. 19, 4; Jos., Ant. 14, 267).
    γ. by the acc. and inf. (pres. Pla., Gorg. 524a; PTebt 314, 3 [II A.D.]; 4 Macc 5:25; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 160; Just., A I, 8, 2 al.; Ath. 20, 3) πιστεύω τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ac 8:37b.—GMary 463, 8.—IRo 10:2.—By the inf. (Thu 2, 22, 1; Job 15:22; AscIs 2:10 εἰς οὐρανὸν ἀναβῆναι) πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11 (difft. JNolland, NTS 27, ’80, 112f [inf. of result: ‘we believe (in order) to be saved’]).—By the acc. and ptc. ἐν σαρκὶ αὐτὸν πιστεύω ὄντα I believe that he was in the flesh ISm 3:1.
    δ. by means of the dat. of thing give credence to, believe (Aeschyl., Pers. 786 θεῶν θεσφάτοισιν; Soph., Phil. 1374 τοῖς ἐμοῖς λόγοις, El. 886; Pla., Phd. 88c, Leg. 7, 798d; Polyb. 5, 42, 9; 9, 33, 1; Herodian 7, 5, 5 ἐλπίδι κρείττονι; BGU 674, 6 τῷ λόγῳ; 2 Ch 9:6 τοῖς λόγοις; Ps 105:24; Pr 14:15; Sir 19:15; En 104:13 ταῖς βίβλοις; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 τοῖς κενοῖς λογισμοῖς, Virt. 68 the sayings of God; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 286, Ant. 10, 39 τ. λόγοις; Tat. 18, 2 ὕλης οἰκονομία; Ath. 30, 2 ταῖς γοναῖς τοῦ Διό; Iren. 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I 92, 4] ἡ ἐκκλησία … π. τούτοις [sc. κήρυγμα and πίστις]) οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου Lk 1:20 (cp. Iambl., ViPyth. 28, 148 περὶ θεῶν μηδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἀπιστεῖν ‘concerning the gods nothing is so marvelous that it should occasion unbelief’). τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ λόγῳ J 2:22. Cp. 4:50; 5:47ab. τοῖς γεγραμμένοις Ac 24:14 (Diod S 16, 52, 7 πιστεύσαντες τοῖς γεγραμμένοις). τῇ ἐπαγγελίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cl 11:1 (Diod S 1, 53, 10 τῇ τοῦ προρρήσει πιστεύειν; 19, 90, 3). τῷ ψεύδει, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 2 Th 2:11, 12. τῇ καταλαλιᾷ Hm 2:2. τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν (Is 53:1; cp. Jos., C. Ap. 2, 14 π. ἀκοῇ πρεσβυτέρων) J 12:38; Ro 10:16; 1 Cl 16:3. τοῖς ἔργοις J 10:38b (=their testimony); Hm 6, 2, 10a (that they are good and must be followed).—Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τῷ λόγῳ μου they believed my word Hm 3:3.
    ε. w. prepositional expressions: εἰς Ro 4:18, if εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτόν here is dependent on ἐπίστευσεν. πιστεύειν εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν believe in the witness 1J 5:10c. ὁ Χριστιανισμὸς οὐκ εἰς Ἰουδαϊσμὸν ἐπίστευσεν the Christian way of life/Christianity did not commit itself to the Judean way/Judaism (s. Hdb. ad loc.) I Mg 10:3a; cp. b (Χριστιανισμόν, εἰς ὸ̔ν πᾶσα γλῶσσα πιστεύσασα). On πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄνομά τινος s. 2aβ below. πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ believe in the gospel (so Ps 105:12 ἐπίστευσαν ἐν τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. Rather in the sense ‘put one’s trust in’ Sir 32:21 μὴ πιστεύσῃς ἐν ὁδῷ ἀπροσκόπῳ. See B-D-F §187, 6; Rob. 540. ALoisy, Les Évangiles synopt. I 1907, 430; 434; comm.) Mk 1:15 (Hofmann understands it as ‘on the basis of’, Wohlenberg ‘bei’; Lohmeyer is undecided; Dssm. and Mlt. 67f ‘in the sphere of’; s. p. 235). ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ οὐ πιστεύω IPhld 8:2 (s. Bihlmeyer ad loc.).—ἐπί τινι: πιστεύειν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33 (Is 28:16).
    ⓑ w. the pers. to whom one gives credence or whom one believes, in the dat. (Demosth. 18, 10; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 14 p. 1390a, 32; Polyb. 15, 26, 6 τοῖς εἰδόσι τὴν ἀλήθειαν; Herodian 2, 1, 10; PHib 72, 18; POxy 898, 29; PTebt 418, 15; Ex 4:1, 5; 3 Km 10:7; 2 Ch 32:15; Tob 2:14; Jer 47:14; JosAs 13:10; Philo, Praem. 49; Just., A I, 33, 5, D 7, 2 al.) τοῖς θεασαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they did not believe those who saw him after he was raised from the dead Mk 16:14. Cp. Mt 21:25, 32abc; Mk 11:31; 16:13; Lk 20:5; J 5:46a; Ac 8:12; 26:27a (τ. προφήταις as Jos., Ant. 11, 96); 1J 4:1; Hm 6, 1, 2ab.—Also of Jesus and God whom one believes, in that one accepts their disclosures without doubt or contradiction: Jesus: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 5:38, 46b; 6:30; 8:45, 46; 10:37, 38a. God: J 5:24; Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6), 17 κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ (= κατέναντι θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστευσεν); Gal 3:6; Js 2:23; 1 Cl 10:6 (all three Gen 15:6). ὁ μὴ πιστεύων τῷ θεῷ ψεύστην πεποίηκεν αὐτόν 1J 5:10b. AcPl Ha 3, 7.
    ⓒ w. pers. and thing added π. τινί τι believe someone with regard to someth. (X., Apol. 15 μηδὲ ταῦτα εἰκῇ πιστεύσητε τῷ θεῷ) Hm 6, 2, 6.—W. dat. of pers. and ὅτι foll. (ApcEsdr 4:35 p. 29, 12 Tdf.): πιστεύετέ μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί J 14:11a. Cp. 4:21; Ac 27:25.
    ⓓ abs. (in which case the context supplies the obj., etc.; cp. ParJer 7:19 γέγονε δὲ τοῦτο, ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν) ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ• ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, μὴ πιστεύσητε do not believe (him or it [the statement]) Mt 24:23; cp. vs. 26; Mk 13:21; Lk 22:67; J 3:12ab; 10:25f; 12:47 v.l.; 14:29; 16:31; 19:35; 20:8, 25; cp. GJs 19:3. J 20:29ab πιστεύσαντες those who have nevertheless believed (it=the fact of the Resurrection); Ac 4:4; 26:27b; 1 Cor 11:18 πιστεύω I believe (it=that there are divisions among you); 15:11; Js 2:19b even the daemons believe this; Jd 5. Pass. καρδίᾳ πιστεύεται with (or in) the heart men believe (it=that Jesus was raised fr. the dead) Ro 10:10.
    ⓔ believe = let oneself be influenced κατά τινος against someone Pol 6:1.
    ⓕ πιστεύομαι I am believed, I enjoy confidence (X., An. 7, 6, 33; Diod S 5, 80, 4 τοῖς μάλιστα πιστευομένοις ἐπηκολουθήσαμεν; 17, 32, 1; 1 Km 27:12; Jos., Ant. 10, 114; PGM 12, 279 πιστευθήσῃ=you will be believed) of Eve παρθένος πιστεύεται people believe that she is a virgin Dg 12:8, or perh. a virgin is entrusted (to someone without fear). S. 3 below.
    ② to entrust oneself to an entity in complete confidence, believe (in), trust, w. implication of total commitment to the one who is trusted. In our lit. God and Christ are objects of this type of faith that relies on their power and nearness to help, in addition to being convinced that their revelations or disclosures are true. The obj. is
    ⓐ given
    α. in the dat. (cp. Soph., Philoct. 1374 θεοῖς πιστ.; X., Mem. 1, 1, 5; Ps.-Pla., Epinom. 980c πιστεύσας τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχου; Ptolem. Lagi [300 B.C.]: 138 Fgm. 8 Jac.; Maximus Tyr. 3, 8k τῷ Ἀπόλλωνι; Epict., app. E, 10 p. 488 Sch. θεῷ; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 18 πῶς Διονύσῳ πιστεύσω; how can I trust D.?; UPZ 144, 12 [164 B.C.] τ. θεοῖς; Jdth 14:10; Wsd 16:26; 4 Macc 7:21 al. in LXX; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 πιστεύειν θεῷ, Rer. Div. Her. 92 μόνῳ θεῷ, Op. M. 45, Sacr. Abel. 70 τῷ σωτήρι θεῷ, Abr. 269, Mos. 1, 225, Virt. 216 [on faith in Philo s. Bousset, Rel.3 446ff; EHatch, Essays in Biblical Gk. 1889, 83ff; ASchlatter, D. Glaube im NT4 1927; EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1908, 21925; HWindisch, Die Frömmigkeit Philos 1909, 23ff; HWolfson, Philo ’47 I, 143–56, esp. II, 215–18; WPeisker, D. Glaubensbegriff bei Philon, diss. ’36]; Jos., Ant. 2, 117; 333; 3, 309; 20, 48, Bell. 3, 387 [s. ASchlatter, D. Theol. d. Judentums nach d. Bericht des Jos. ’32, 104ff]; Just., A I, 18, 6 al.). Some of the passages referred to in 1b above, end, are repeated, since they may be classified here or there w. equal justification. Of God: π. τῷ θεῷ (Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 15) Ac 16:34; 13:12 D; Tit 3:8; PtK 4 p. 16, 2; B 16:7; Hm 12, 6, 2; Hs 5, 1, 5. Cp. m 1:2; AcPl Ha 10, 13f. τῷ κυρίῳ (Sir 11:21; 2:8) Hv 4, 2, 6. οἱ πιστεύσαντες τῷ κυρίῳ διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 13, 5. τῷ θεῷ w. ὅτι foll. m 9:7; cp. Hs 1:7.—Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l. (for ἐπʼ αὐτόν); J 6:30 (σοί=vs. 29 εἰς ὸ̔ν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος); J 8:31 (αὐτῷ=vs. 30 εἰς αὐτόν, but see Mlt. 67f; JSwetnam argues for a plpf. sense here: Biblica 61, ’80, 106–9); Ac 5:14; 18:8a (both τῷ κυρίῳ); Ro 10:14b (οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν = τούτῳ [about equivalent to εἰς τοῦτον; cp. vs. 14a] οὗ οὐκ ἤκ.); 2 Ti 1:12; ITr 9:2; Hs 8, 3, 2.—Pass. be believed in (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 8; 6, 1, 39; Pla., Lach. 181b; Ps.-Demosth. 58, 44 al.; 1 Km 27:12; Just., D. 7, 3; Tat. 10, 2. S. B-D-F §312, 1; also s. Rob. 815f) ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Ti 3:16.—π. τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ υἱοῦ believe in the name of the Son, i.e. believe in the Son and accept what his name proclaims him to be 1J 3:23.
    β. w. εἰς (cp. Hippol., Elench. 6, 19, 7 W. οἱ εἰς τὸν Σίμωνα καὶ τὴν Ἑλένην πεπιστευκότες; Just., D. 35, 8 al.) God (BGU 874, 11 π. εἰς τὸν θεόν): J 12:44b; 14:1a (cp. ET 21, 1910, 53–57; 68–70; 138f); 1 Pt 1:21 v.l.=Pol 2:1.—Christ: Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42; J 2:11; 3:15 v.l., 16, 18a, 36; 4:39; 6:29, 35, 40, 47 v.l.; 7:5, 31, 38f, 48; 8:30; 9:35f; 10:42; 11:25, 26a, 45, 48; 12:11, 36 (εἰς τὸ φῶς), 37, 42, 44a, 46; 14:1b, 12; 16:9; 17:20; Ac 10:43; 14:23; 18:8 D; 19:4; Ro 10:14a; Gal 2:16; Phil 1:29; 1 Pt 1:8; 1J 5:10a; AcPlCor 2:31; Hs 8, 3, 2.—εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ (or αὐτοῦ, etc.) J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18c; 1J 5:13 (s. ὄνομα 1dβ and s. 2aα above, end). π. εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ITr 2:1. π. εἰς τὸ αἷμα Χριστοῦ ISm 6:1.
    γ. w. ἐπί and dat., of God Ac 11:17 D. Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 3:15 v.l.; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16); 1 Ti 1:16.
    δ. w. ἐπί and acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 46, 1 al.) of God: Ac 16:34 D; Ro 4:5, 24; PtK 3 p. 15, 12. Of Christ: Mt 27:42; J 3:15 v.l.; Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19.
    ε. π. ἔν τινι believe in someone (Jer 12:6; Da 6:24 Theod.; Ps 77:22) is questionable in our lit.: in J 3:15 the best rdg. is ἐν αὐτῷ and is prob. to be construed w. ἔχῃ (in J πιστεύω usually takes the prep. εἰς when expressing the obj. of belief, as in 3:16); in Eph 1:13 both occurrences of ἐν ᾧ are prob. to be construed w. ἐσφραγίσθητε (=‘in connection with whom you have been sealed’ [cp. 4:30]); the acts of hearing and believing are coordinate, and πιστεύσαντες, along w. ἀκούσαντες, is used abs. (so REB; less clearly NRSV). But s. 1aε above: π. ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ Mk 1:15; IPhld 8:2.
    ⓑ not expressed at all (the abs. πιστεύειν in a transcendent sense: Aeschin., In Ctesiph. 1 ἐγὼ πεπιστευκὼς ἥκω πρῶτον τοῖς θεοῖς; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 17, 1391b, 1ff; Plut., Mor. 170f; Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24 πιστεῦσαι δεῖ, ὅτι [=because] μόνη σωτηρία ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐπιστροφή; Herm. Wr. 9, 10ab ἐπίστευσε καὶ ἐν τῇ καλῇ πίστει ἐπανεπαύσατο; cp. 1, 32 πιστεύω καὶ μαρτυρῶ=PapBerl 9795 [RReitzenstein, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, p. 161, 2]; Num 20:12; Ps 115:1; Is 7:9; Sir 2:13; 1 Macc 2:59; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 14; 101, Deus Imm. 4, Mut. Nom. 178; τότε πιστεύσεις θέλων καὶ μὴ θέλων Theoph. Ant. 1, 8 [p. 74, 7]) Mk 15:32; 16:16f; Lk 8:12f; J 1:7, 50; 3:15, 18b; 4:41f, 48, 53; 5:44; 6:36, 47, 64ab, perh. 69 (MEnslin, The Perf. Tense in the Fourth Gosp.: JBL 55, ’36, 121–31, esp. 128); 9:38; 10:26; 11:15, 40; 12:39; 20:31b; Ac 4:4; 8:13, 37a; 11:21; 13:12, 39, 48; 14:1; 15:5, 7; 17:12, 34; 18:8b, 27; 19:2; 21:25; Ro 1:16; 3:22; 4:11; 10:4; 13:11; 15:13; 1 Cor 1:21; 3:5; 15:2; Gal 3:22; Eph 1:13, 19; 1 Th 2:10, 13; Hb 4:3; 1 Pt 2:7; 1 Cl 12:7; 2 Cl 17:3; 20:2; B 9:3; B 11:11; ISm 3:2; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 17, 4; 9, 22, 3. τὸ πιστεύειν faith IMg 9:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ πιστεύειν IPhld 9:2 (ἐν ἀγάπῃ is here used adv.).—Participles in the var. tenses are also used almost subst.: (οἱ) πιστεύοντες (the) believers, (the) Christians (Orig., C. Cels. 1, 13, 34; Did., Gen. 106, 6) Ac 2:44; Ro 3:22; 1 Cor 14:22ab (opp. οἱ ἄπιστοι); 1 Th 1:7; Hs 8, 3, 3. (οἱ) πιστεύσαντες (those) who made their commitment = (those) who became believers, (the) Christians, Ac 2:44 v.l.; 4:32; 2 Th 1:10a; 2 Cl 2:3; Hs 9, 19, 1. οἱ πεπιστευκότες those who became (and remained) believers Ac 19:18; 21:20 (Just., D. 122, 2).—οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν future believers 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3a. οἱ νῦν πιστεύσαντες those who have just come to believe ibid. 4, 3, 3b.
    ⓒ A special kind of this faith is the confidence that God or Christ is in a position to help suppliants out of their distress, have confidence (some of the passages already mentioned might just as well be classified here) abs. ὡς ἐπίστευσας γενηθήτω σοι may it be done to you in accordance with the confidence you have Mt 8:13. ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητε πιστεύοντες whatever you pray for with confidence 21:22. Cp. Mk 5:36; 9:23f; Lk 8:50; 2 Cor 4:13a (Ps 115:1), b. W. ὅτι foll.: πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; do you have confidence that I am able to do this? Mt 9:28.—Mk 11:23.
    ③ entrust τινί τι someth. to someone (X., Mem. 4, 4, 17; Plut., Mor. 519e; Athen. 8, 341a; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 25, 1; SIG2 845, 7, see for numerous other examples index VI p. 384b. Cp. Wsd 14:5; 1 Macc 8:16; 4 Macc 4:7; TestJob 11:11; Jos., Bell. 4, 492; Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 6) τὸ ἀληθινὸν τίς ὑμῖν πιστεύσει; Lk 16:11. αὐτῷ τοσούτων πιστευο̣μ̣έ̣ν̣ω̣ν̣ since so many (or so much) were ( was) entrusted to him AcPl Ha 7, 21 (connection uncertain). αὐτόν (so N. and Tdf.; v.l. ἑαυτόν) τινι trust oneself to someone (Brutus, Ep. 25; Plut., Mor. 181d ἀνδρὶ μᾶλλον ἀγαθῷ πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν ἢ ὀχυρῷ τόπῳ=entrusting himself to a good man rather than to a stronghold; EpArist 270; Jos., Ant. 12, 396) J 2:24 (EStauffer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 281–99.—Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 39a οὐ τοῖς τυχοῦσι φίλοις ἑαυτὸν ἐπίστευσεν=he did not trust himself to casual friends).—Pass. πιστεύομαί τι (B-D-F §159, 4) I am entrusted with someth. (Pla., Ep. 1, 309a; Polyb. 8, 17, 5; 31, 26, 7; Diod S 20, 19, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 136 §568 ἃ ἐπιστεύθην; ins; pap [e.g. PLond I, 121, 608 p. 203]; Jos., Bell. 5, 567, Vi. 137; Ath. 24, 3. Cp. Esth 8:12e.—Dssm., LO 320f [LAE 379]). ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:2. πεπίστευμαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Gal 2:7 (PGM 13, 140 ὁ ὑπό σου πάντα πιστευθείς; 446); cp. 1 Th 2:4; 1 Ti 1:11.—Tit 1:3. οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι 1 Cor 9:17; cp. Dg 7:1. S. also 7:2; IMg 6:1; IPhld 9:1ab. πιστεύομαί τι παρά τινος I am entrusted by someone with someth. (Polyb. 3, 69, 1; Jos., Bell. 1, 667): οἱ πιστευθέντες παρὰ θεοῦ ἔργον τοιοῦτο 1 Cl 43:1.
    ④ be confident about, a unique use found in ὸ̔ς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα, someth. like the one is confident about eating anything Ro 14:2 (a combination of two ideas: ‘the pers. is so strong in the faith’ and: ‘the pers. is convinced that it is permissible to eat anything’; in brief: not cultically fussy. See Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; but also B-D-F §397, 2). Another probability is the sense
    ⑤ think/consider (possible), in Ro 14:2 perh. holds everything possible; cp. J 9:18 οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they refused to entertain the possibility, and Ac 9:26. S. 4 above.—For lit. s. πίστις, end. DELG s.v. πείθομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πιστεύω

  • 18 ἐνώπιον

    ἐνώπιον prop. neut. of ἐνώπιος, functioning as a prep. (s. on ἀνά beg.) w. gen. (as SIG2 843, 7 [Trajan] ἐνώπιον τῶν προγεγραμμένων θεῶν, cp. Plut. Mor. 274b, 3; PCairZen 73, 14 [257 B.C.]; PLond II, 35, 6 p. 25 [161 B.C.] restored; PGrenf I 38, 11; POxy 658, 9; LXX, pseudepigr.; Just., A I, 50, 5 [for ἐνάντιον Is 53:12, so also in 4 other LXX quot.]) esp. in Lk (22 times), Ac (13 times) and Rv (32 times); 9 times in 1 Cl; once each in J, 1J, 3J, Js, 1 Pt; not at all in Mt, Mk, 2 Pt, 2J, Jd.
    ① pert. to a position in front of an entity, before someone or someth. εἶναι ἐ. τινος Rv 7:15; usu. εἶναι must be supplied 1:4; 4:5f; 8:3; 9:13. After ‘stand’, ‘place’, ‘step’, etc. (schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1043b of suppliants: ὥσπερ ἐνώπιον τῶν θεῶν ἱστάμενοι): στῆναι Ac 10:30; GJs 11:2; ἑστηκέναι Rv 7:9; 8:2 (RCharles, ICC Rv ad loc.: attend upon, be in the service of); 11:4; 12:4; 20:12; παρεστηκέναι (cp. 3 Km 12:6; Judg 20:28) Lk 1:19; Ac 4:10; ἱστάναι 6:6; καθῆσθαι Rv 11:16. θύρα ἠνεῳγμένη ἐ. τινος a door that stands open before someone 3:8. After verbs of motion: τιθέναι Lk 5:18; βάλλειν Rv 4:10; ἀναβαίνειν 8:4; πίπτειν of worshippers or admirers falling down before someone (1 Km 25:23) 4:10; 5:8; cp. 7:11; προσκυνεῖν (Ps 21:28, cp. 30) Lk 4:7; Rv 3:9; 15:4 (cp. 22:8; on this Hebraism s. προσκυνέω a). Of a forerunner or herald: after προέρχεσθαι (cp. 2 Ch 1:10; 1 Km 12:2ab) Lk 1:17; προπορεύεσθαι vs. 76. σκάνδαλα βάλλειν ἐ. τινος Rv 2:14.
    ② pert. to being present or in view, in the sight of, in the presence of, among
    ⓐ lit. φαγεῖν ἐ. τινος Lk 24:43; 13:26 (cp. 2 Km 11:13; 3 Km 1:25). σημεῖα ποιεῖν J 20:30. ἀνακρίνειν Lk 23:14; cp. 5:25; 8:47; Ac 19:9, 19; 27:35; Rv 13:13; 14:3, 10; 3J 6; ἐ. πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 Ti 6:12. ἐ. πάντων 5:20; cp. Lk 11:53 D; βαπτισθῆναι ἐ. αὐτοῦ 3:7 D (s. 4b below); χορεύσασα ἐ. τῶν ἀγγέλων GJs 15:3.
    ⓑ nonliteral ἡμεῖς ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ πάρεσμεν Ac 10:33. Also after verbs of motion βαστάζειν τὸ ὄνομα ἐ. τ. ἐθνῶν Ac 9:15. After ἀρνεῖσθαι Lk 12:9; ὁμολογεῖν Rv 3:5; 2 Cl 3:2 (ἔμπροσθεν Mt 10:32); κατηγορεῖν 12:10; καυχᾶσθαι 1 Cor 1:29; δικαιοῦν ἑαυτόν Lk 16:15. πίστιν κατὰ σεαυτὸν ἔχε ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ keep (your) conviction to yourself in the sight of God (=keep … between yourself and God) Ro 14:22 (s. πίστις 2dε); cp. 2 Cor 4:2; MPol 14:1f. Also a favorite expr. in assertions and oaths which call upon God, as the One who sees all: Gal 1:20; 1 Ti 5:21; 6:13; 2 Ti 2:14; 4:1.—Such renderings as among, before, in the presence of are also appropriate for the following: γίνεται χαρὰ ἐ. τῶν ἀγγέλων Lk 15:10. ἔσται σοι δόξα ἐ. πάντων 14:10. εὑρίσκειν χάριν ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 7:46 (cp. Gen 6:8 v.l. [ARahlfs, Genesis 1926, 61] al.). ἐ. τοῦ πάντων δεσπότου GJs 11:2.—προορώμην τ. κύριον ἐ. μου Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8).—After verbs of remembering and forgetting: μνησθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 10:31; Rv 16:19. ἐπιλελησμένον ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 12:6 (cp. ἐρωτηθῆναι ἐνώπιον τῆς ἁγίας δόξης σου TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 22 [Stone p. 64]).—For dat. auctoris: εἰσηκούσθη ἡ δέησις σου ἐ. κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ GJs 20:3 (cp. PsSol 1:2; GrBar 1:5).
    ③ pert. to exposure to value judgment, in the opinion/ judgment of ἐ. ἑαυτῶν B 4:11 (Is 5:21); ἐ. ἀνθρώπων Ro 12:17; 2 Cor 8:21b; Pol 6:1 (cp. Pr 3:4). As a rule (as 2 Cor 8:21a) of θεός or κύριος; so after τὰ ἀρεστά 1J 3:22; βδέλυγμα Lk 16:15; δίκαιος 1:6 v.l.; Ac 4:19; δικαιοσύνη Lk 1:75; δικαιοῦσθαι Ro 3:20; εὐάρεστος Hb 13:21; 1 Cl 21:1; 60:2 (cp. Dt 13:19); καλός, ἀπόδεκτος 1 Ti 2:3; 5:4; μέγας (4 Km 5:1) Lk 1:15; πολυτελής 1 Pt 3:4; πεπληρωμένος Rv 3:2. The combinations ἀρεστός and εὐάρεστος ἐ. τινος cited above form a transition to combinations in which ἐ. w. gen. stands simply for the dative: ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐ. παντὸς τ. πλήθους Ac 6:5 (cp. Dt 1:23 v.l.; 2 Km 3:36). φανεροῦσθαι ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 7:12; cp. Lk 24:11; Hb 4:13.—Prob. this is the place also for ἡ ἁμαρτία μου ἐνώπιόν μου ἐστίν 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:5); ταπεινώθητε ἐ. κυρίου humble yourselves before the Lord Js 4:10.
    ④ special uses
    ⓐ in relation to ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τινος sin against someone Lk 15:18, 21 (cp. Jdth 5:17; 1 Km 7:6; 20:1).
    ⓑ by the authority of, on behalf of Rv 13:12, 14; 19:20. Also simply by Lk 3:7 D (but s. 2a).—Johannessohn, Präpositionen 194–97; 359–61; AWikenhauser, Ἐνώπιος—ἐνώπιον—κατενώπιον: BZ 8, 1910, 263–70.—DELG s.v. ἐνῶπα. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐνώπιον

  • 19 ἡμέρα

    ἡμέρα, ας, ἡ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.)
    ① the period betw. sunrise and sunset, day
    ⓐ lit. (opp. νύξ; e.g. Ath. 24, 2 ἀντιδοξοῦντι … ὡς … τῇ ἡμέρᾳ νύξ) Mt 4:2 (fasting for 40 days and 40 nights as Ex 34:28. S. νύξ 1d.—Cp. JosAs 13:8 ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας καὶ ἑπτὰ νύκτας; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 1, 10 ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας κ. τὰς ἴσας νύκτας); 12:40 and oft. ἡμέρα γίνεται day is breaking (X., An. 2, 2, 13; 7, 2, 34; Appian, Iber. 74 §315; Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; 6:13; 22:66; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 27:29, 39. ἡμέρα διαυγάζει the day dawns 2 Pt 1:19. κλίνει declines, evening approaches Lk 9:12; 24:29 (cp. Just., D. 56, 16 ἡμέρα προκόπτει). φαίνει shines Rv 8:12. In the gen. to denote a point of time ἡμέρας in daylight (Hippocr., Ep. 19, 7; Arrian, Ind. 13, 6; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 1, 10) 1 Cl 25:4. ἡμέρας μέσης at midday, noon (Lucian, Nigr. 34; cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 190) Ac 26:13. But also, as in Thu. et al., of time within which someth. occurs, ἡμέρας during the day Rv 21:25. ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός (by) day and night (Appian, Liby. 121, §576; Arrian, Anab. 7, 11, 4; Jos., Ant. 11, 171; Just., D. 1, 4 διʼ ὅλης νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας; also in reverse order as Is 34:10) Mk 5:5; Lk 18:7; Ac 9:24; 1 Th 2:9; 3:10; 2 Th 3:8; AcPl Ha 2, 10; 3, 2. The acc. of time νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν (in this sequence Dio Chrys. 7 [8], 15; Ael. Aristid. 51, 1 K.=27 p. 534 D.; Esth 4:16; cp. νύκτωρ καὶ μεθʼ ἡμέραν Mel., HE 4, 26, 5; Ath. 34, 3) (throughout the) day and (the) night Mk 4:27; Lk 2:37; Ac 20:31; 26:7. τὰς ἡμέρας every day (opp. τὰς νύκτας; cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 36; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 199) Lk 21:37; cp. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν (throughout) every day Ac 5:42 (cp. Hdt. 7, 203, 1). τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην (throughout) that day (Ael. Aristid. 49, 45 K.) J 1:39. ὅλην τ. ἡμ. (Jos., Ant. 6, 22) Mt 20:6. The acc. in a distributive sense συμφωνεῖν ἐκ δηναρίου τὴν ἡμέραν on a denarius a day Mt 20:2 (s. Meisterhans3-Schw. 205; pap in Mlt., ClR 15, 1901, 436; 18, 1904, 152). ἡμέρας ὁδός a day’s journey Lk 2:44 (cp. X., An. 2, 2, 12; Gen 31:23; 1 Macc 5:24; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 21; 23). Daylight lasts for twelve hours, during which a person can walk without stumbling J 11:9ab. ἡ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφή reveling in broad daylight 2 Pt 2:13.
    ⓑ fig. (SibOr 5, 241) Christians as υἱοὶ φωτὸς καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας children of light and of the day 1 Th 5:5; cp. vs. 8 (in contrast, Aristoph., Fgm. 573 K. calls Chaerephon, the friend of Socrates νυκτὸς παῖδα, in a derogatory sense). In J 9:4 day denotes the period of human life; cp. Ro 13:12f.
    ② civil or legal day, including the night, day Mt 6:34; 15:32; Mk 6:21; Lk 13:14; B 15:3ff. Opp. hours Mt 25:13; hours, months, years Rv 9:15; cp. Gal 4:10.
    ⓐ In the gen., answering the question, how long? (Nicostrat. Com., Fgm. 5 K. ἡμερῶν τριῶν ἤδη=now for three days; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 13 W. τριῶν ἡμ.; BGU 37, 7 [50 A.D.]; 249, 11 [70–80 A.D.] ἡμερῶν δύο διαμένομεν) τεσσεράκοντα ἡμερῶν during 40 days Ac 1:3 D*. ἑκάστης ἡμέρας each day AcPl Ha 6, 8 (cp. ILegGort 1, 9 of a fine τᾶς ἁμέρας ϝεκάστας ‘for each day’, on the gen. Buck, Dialects §170; Just., D. 2, 6 al.)—In the dat., answering the quest., when? (X., An. 4, 7, 8; Jdth 7:6; Esth 7:2; Bel 40 Theod.; JosAs 11:1; Just., A I, 67, 7 al.) τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ (cp. Arrian, Anab. 6, 4, 1 τρίτῃ ἡμ.; AscIs 3:16 τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμ.; JosAs 29:8; Just., D. 100, 1 al., cp. D. 85, 6 τῇ δευτέρᾳ ἡμ.) Mt 16:21; 17:23; Lk 9:22; 24:7, 46; 1 Cor 15:4. ᾗ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ on the day on which (PLille 15, 1 [242 B.C.] ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ; 1 Esdr 1:49; Jos., Ant. 20, 26) Lk 17:29; cp. vs. 30. μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ in (the course of) one day (Appian, Iber. 58 §244) 1 Cor 10:8.
    ⓑ In the acc., usu. answering the quest., how long? (X., An. 4, 7, 18; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 26 p. 410, 30 Jac. τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην=throughout that day; Polyaenus 6, 53 τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Arrian, Anab. 6, 2, 3; Lucian, Alex. 15 ἡμέρας=several days; Philo, Vi. Cont. 30 τὰς ἓξ ἡμέρας; JosAs 10:20 τὰς ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας) ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν the whole day long Ro 8:36 (Ps 43:23), 10:21 (Is 65:2). ἡμέραν μίαν for one day Ac 21:7 (Just., D. 12, 3). ἔμειναν οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας J 2:12; cp. 4:40; 11:6; Ac 9:19; 10:48; 16:12; 20:6c; 21:4, 10; Gal 1:18; Rv 11:3, 9. ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας day after day (Ps.-Euripides, Rhes. 445f, Henioch. 5, 13 Kock; Gen 39:10; Num 30:15; Is 58:2; Ps 95:2; Sir 5:7; En) 2 Pt 2:8; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.; s. also e below, end). Only rarely does the acc. answer the quest., when? (Antiphanes Com. [IV B.C.] Fgm. 280; Ps.-Lucian, Halc. 3 τρίτην ἡμ.) τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς πεντηκοστῆς on the Day of Pentecost Ac 20:16. Peculiar is the expr. τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν προσδοκῶντες this is the fourteenth day you have been waiting Ac 27:33 (cp. X., An. 4, 5, 24 ἐνάτην ἡμέραν γεγαμημένην).—ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας seven times a day Lk 17:4.
    ⓒ Used w. prep.: ἀπό w. gen. from … (on) Mt 22:46; J 11:53; Ac 20:18. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας (PRev 9, 1 [258 B.C.]; PsSol 18:11f; EpArist 24) Col 1:6, 9; Hm 4, 4, 3. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι … Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι … Ac 10:30. ἄχρι w. gen. until Mt 24:38b; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2; 2:29. ἄχρι ἡμερῶν πέντε five days later Ac 20:6b. μέχρι τῆς σήμερον (ἡμέρας) up to the present day (1 Esdr 8:74) Mt 28:15. ἕως τ. ἡμέρας Mt 27:64; Ac 1:22; Ro 11:8 (Dt 29:3; Just., D. 134, 5 ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμ.; for this Ath. 2, 1 εἰς … τὴν σήμερον ἡμ.). διʼ ἡμερῶν after (several) days Mk 2:1 (cp. Hdt. 6, 118, 3 διʼ ἐτέων εἴκοσι; Thu. 2, 94, 3; Pla., Hipp. Maj. 281a διὰ χρόνου=after a [long] time). διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν within three days (PPetr II, 4 [6], 8 διʼ ἡμερῶν ε´=in the course of 5 days) Mt 26:61; Mk 14:58. διʼ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα Ac 1:3 (s. διά A 2a). διὰ τ. ἡμέρας in the course of the day Lk 9:37 D εἰς τ. ἡμέραν for the day (PPetr III, 95 col. 2, 6 [III B.C.]) J 12:7; Rv 9:15; εἰς ἡμέρας μ´ 40 days long AcPl Ha 6, 11. ἐν τῇ ἡμ. in the daytime J 11:9b. ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν one day Lk 5:17; 8:22; 20:1. ἐν on w. dat. sing. Mt 24:50; Lk 1:59; 13:31 v.l. (Just., D. 29, 3 ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμ.; 111, 3 ἐν ἡμ. τοῦ πάσχα); J 5:9; Hb 4:4 (cp. Gen 2:2); AcPl Ha 3, 9. In, within w. dat. pl. (Alexis Com. 246, 2 K. ἐν πένθʼ ἡμέραις; Philo, Somn. 2, 112; TestJob 30:4; JosAs 21:7 ἐν ταῖς ἑπτὰ ἡμέραις τοῦ γάμου) ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (PTebt 14, 5 [114 B.C.]; Porphyr., Vi. Plot. 17 p. 111, 26 W.; TestJob 24:9; EpArist 24) Mt 27:40; Mk 15:29; J 2:19f.—ἐπί w. acc. over a period of ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (PTurin I, 2, 15 [116 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱκανὰς ἡμ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31; cp. 27:20; ἐπὶ πολλὰς ἡμ. (Jos., Ant. 18, 57) 16:18; cp. Hb 11:30. καθʼ ἡμέραν every day (Hyperid. 6, 23; 26; Polyb. 1, 57, 7; 4, 18, 2 al.; Diod S 1, 36, 7 and 8; 2, 47, 2 al.; SIG 656, 22; UPZ 42, 13 [162 B.C.]; PGiss 17, 1; Tob 10:7; Sus 8 and 12 Theod.; 1 Macc 8:15; EpArist 304; Jos., Bell. 2, 265, Ant. 20, 205; Ar. [POxy 1778, 27]; Just., D. 39, 2 al.) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49 (‘by day’: AArgyle, ET 63, ’51/52, 354); Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; 2 Cor 11:28; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also (w. optional art., s. B-D-F §160; Rob. 766) τὸ καθʼ ἡμ. (Aristoph., Equ. 1126; Pla.; Polyb. 4, 18, 2; POxy 1220, 4; TestJob 14:2; but simply καθʼ ἡμ. Ac 2:45 D) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l.; καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμ. every day (X., Mem. 4, 2, 12, Equ. 5, 9; PTebt 412, 2; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18; Ex 5:8; Esth 2:11; Job 1:4; Bel 4:6; PsSol 18:11; GrBar 8:4) Hb 3:13. κατὰ πᾶσαν ἡμ. w. same mng. (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:17. μεθʼ ἡμέρας ἕξ six days later (PSI 502, 16 [257 B.C.] μεθʼ ἡμέρας ιβ´; 436, 3 [Just., D. 27, 5 μετὰ μίαν ἡμ. al.]) Mt 17:1; cp. 26:2; 27:63; Mk 8:31; Lk 1:24; J 4:43; 20:26; Ac 1:5; 15:36; 24:1; 28:13; AcPl Ha 1, 33; 11, 8; AcPlCor 2:30. πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα six days before the Passover J 12:1 (not a Latinism, since it is found as early as Hippocr. πρὸ τριῶν ἡμερῶν τῆς τελευτῆς [WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15; Rydbeck 64f]; cp. Plut., Symp. 8, 717d; Lucian, De Morte Peregr. 1; Aelian, HA 11, 19; mystery ins of Andania [SIG 736, 70 πρὸ ἁμερᾶν δέκα τῶν μυστηρίων]; PFay 118, 15; PHolm 4, 23; PGM 13, 26; 671; Am 1:1; 2 Macc 15:36; Jos., Ant. 15, 408; Just., D. 27, 5; s. WSchmid, D. Attizismus III 1893, 287f; IV 1897, 629; Mlt. 100f; B-D-F §213).—It is striking to find the nom. denoting time in the expression ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; cp. Lk 9:28 (s. B-D-F §144; Rob. 460).
    ⓓ Of festive days: ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σαββάτων (σάββατον 1bβ) or τοῦ σαββάτου (σάββ. 1a) Lk 4:16; 13:14b, 16; J 19:31; Ac 13:14 (Just., D. 27, 5). ἡ ἡμέρα or αἱ ἡμέραι τ. ἀζύμων Lk 22:7; Ac 12:3; 20:6. ἡ ἡμέρα τ. πεντηκοστῆς Ac 2:1; 20:16. μεγάλη ἡμέρα the great day (of atonement) PtK 2 p. 14, 29. In gen. of a Judean festival GJs 1:2; 2:2 (the author no longer has a clear understanding of the precise festival signified by the term; s. Amann and deStrycker on 1:2). ἡ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα the Lord’s Day, Sunday Rv 1:10 (cp. Just. A I, 67, 7 τὴν … τοῦ ἡλίου ἡμέραν). Festive days are spoken of in the foll. passages: ὸ̔ς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν, ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν one person considers one day better than another, another considers every day good Ro 14:5. φρονεῖν τ. ἡμέραν concern oneself w. (= observe) the day vs. 6. ἡμέρας παρατηρεῖσθαι observe days Gal 4:10.—Used w. gen. to denote what happens or is to be done on the day in question ἡμ. τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ Ac 21:26. τ. ἐνταφιασμοῦ day of burial J 12:7. ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:80 (s. ἀνάδειξις).
    ⓔ OT terminology is reflected in the expr. fulfilling of the days (Ex 7:25; 1 Ch 17:11; Tob 10:1b; cp. מָלֵא) ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμ. τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ the days of his service came to an end Lk 1:23. ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμ. ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν the eighth day, on which he was to be circumcised, had come 2:21; cp. vs. 22. S. ἐκπλήρωσις, συμπληρόω, συντελέω, τελέω, τελειόω. The Hebr. has also furnished the expr. ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ day after day (Esth 3:4 יוֹם וָיוֹם=LXX καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν; יוֹם יוֹם Ps 68:20=LXX 67:20 ἡμέραν καθʼ ἡμέραν) 2 Cor 4:16; GJs 6:1.—ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας (rather oft. in the OT for various Hebr. expressions, but also in Henioch. Com. 5, 13 K.) day after day 2 Pt 2:8; prophetic quot. of unknown origin 2 Cl 11:2. ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας GJs 12:3.
    ③ a day appointed for very special purposes, day (UPZ 66, 5 [153 B.C.] ἡ ἡμ.=the wedding day; ins in ÖJh 64, ’95, p. 74 of a commemorative day for the founder of Ephesus τῇ τοῦ Ἀνδρόκλου ἡμέρᾳ), e.g. of childbirth J 16:21 v.l.
    ⓐ τακτῇ ἡμέρᾳ Ac 12:21. ἡμέραν τάξασθαι (Polyb. 18, 19, 1) 28:23. στῆσαι (Dionys. Hal. 6, 48) 17:31. ὁρίζειν (Polyb., Dionys. Hal.; Epict., Ench. 51, 1) Hb 4:7; Hv 2, 2, 5. Of the day of the census (s. Lk 2:1) αὕτη ἡ ἡμέρα κυρίου GJs 17:1. ἐν ἡμέρᾳ, ᾗ ἔμελλεν θηριομαχῖν ὁ Παῦλος AcPl Ha 3, 9.
    ⓑ esp. of a day of judgment, fixed by a judge
    α. ἀνθρωπίνη ἡμ. a day appointed by a human court 1 Cor 4:3 (cp. the ins on a coin amulet [II/III A.D.] where these words are transl. ‘human judgment’ by CBonner, HTR 43, ’50, 165–68). This expr. is formed on the basis of ἡμ. as designating
    β. the day of God’s final judgment (s. ὥρα 3). ᾗ ἡμ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται the day on which the Human One (Son of Man) reveals himself Lk 17:30; ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμ. 2 Pt 3:12. ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τοῦ θεοῦ τ. παντοκράτορος Rv 16:14. ἡμ. κυρίου (Jo 1:15; 2:1, 11; Is 13:6, 9 al.) occurring only once in the NT of the day of God, the Lord, in an OT quot. πρὶν ἐλθεῖν ἡμ. κυρίου τ. μεγάλην κ. ἐπιφανῆ Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4; cp. JosAs 14:2). Otherw. Jesus Christ is the Lord of this day: 1 Cor 5:5; 1 Th 5:2 (P-ÉLangevin, Jesus Seigneur, ’67, 107–67; GHolland, SBLSP 24, ’85, 327–41); 2 Th 2:2; 2 Pt 3:10. He is oft. mentioned by name or otherw. clearly designated, e.g. as υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρώπου, Lk 17:24; 1 Cor 1:8; 2 Cor 1:14; Phil 1:6, 10; 2:16. ἡ ἐσχάτη ἡμ. the last day (of this age) (s. ἔσχατος 2b) J 6:39f, 44, 54; 11:24; 12:48; Hv 2, 2, 5. ἡμ. (τῆς) κρίσεως (Pr 6:34; Jdth 16:17; PsSol 15:12; En; GrBar 1:7; cp. TestLevi 3:2, 3; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4) Mt 10:15; 11:22, 24; 12:36; 2 Pt 2:9; 3:7; 1J 4:17; 2 Cl 17:6; B 19:10. ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὄτε κρίνει ὁ θεὸς διὰ Χρ. Ἰ. the day on which … Ro 2:16 (RBultmann, TLZ 72, ’47, 200f considers this a gloss). ἡμ. ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ θεοῦ 2:5 (ἡμ. ὀργῆς as Zeph 1:15, 18; 2:3; Ezk 7:19 v.l.; cp. Rv 6:17). ἡ ἡμ. ἡ μεγάλη (Jer 37:7; Mal 3:22) Rv 6:17; 16:14. ἡμ. μεγάλη καὶ θαυμαστή B 6:4. ἡμ. ἀπολυτρώσεως Eph 4:30. ἡμ. ἐπισκοπῆς (s. ἐπισκοπή 1a and b) 1 Pt 2:12. ἡμ. ἀνταποδόσεως B 14:9 (Is 61:2); ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμ. (Zeph 1:15; Am 9:11; Zech 12:3f; Is 10:20; Jer 37:7f) Mt 7:22; Lk 6:23; 10:12; 21:34; 2 Th 1:10; 2 Ti 1:12, 18; 4:8; AcPlCor 2:32. Perh. ἡμ. σφαγῆς (cp. Jer 12:3; En 16:1) Js 5:5 belongs here (s. σφαγή). Abs. ἡμ. 1 Cor 3:13; Hb 10:25; B 7:9; 21:3; cp. 1 Th 5:4.—ἡμέρα αἰῶνος (Sir 18:10) day of eternity 2 Pt 3:18 is also eschatological in mng.; it means the day on which eternity commences, or the day which itself constitutes eternity. In the latter case the pass. would belong to the next section.
    ④ an extended period, time (like יוֹם, but not unknown among the Greeks: Soph., Aj. 131; 623; Eur., Ion 720; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 13, 1389b, 33f; PAmh 30, 43 [II B.C.] ἡμέρας αἰτοῦσα=‘she asked for time’, or ‘a respite’)
    ⓐ in sg. ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ τ. πονηρᾷ when the times are evil (unless the ref. is to the final judgment) Eph 6:13. ἐν ἡμ. σωτηρίας of the salutary time that has come for Christians 2 Cor 6:2 (Is 49:8). Of the time of the rescue fr. Egypt ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου τ. χειρὸς αὐτῶν at the time when I took them by the hand Hb 8:9 (Jer 38:32; on the constr. cp. Bar 2:28 and B-D-F §423, 5; Rob. 514). ἐν ἐκείνῃ τ. ἡμέρᾳ at that time Mk 2:20b; J 14:20; 16:23, 26. τ. ἡμέραν τ. ἐμήν my time (era) 8:56. ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ αὐτοῦ ἡμέρᾳ in his (Abraham’s) last days GJs 1:3.
    ⓑ chiefly in the pl. αἱ ἡμέραι of time of life or activity, w. gen. of pers. (1 Km 17:12 A; 2 Km 21:1; 3 Km 10:21; Esth 1:1s; Sir 46:7; 47:1; ἡμέραι αὐτοῦ En 12:2; ἡμέραι ἃς ἦτε 102:5 and oft.) ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου Mt 2:1; Lk 1:5; Νῶε 17:26a; 1 Pt 3:20; Ἠλίου Lk 4:25. ἐν ταῖς ἡμ. τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου 17:26b; cp. Mt 23:30. ἀπὸ τ. ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου Mt 11:12. ἕως τ. ἡμερῶν Δαυίδ Ac 7:45; cp. 13:41 (Hab 1:5). W. gen. of thing ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως time of vengeance Lk 21:22; τ. ἀπογραφῆς Ac 5:37; cp. Rv 10:7; 11:6. ἐν τ. ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ in the time of his appearance in the flesh Hb 5:7.—ἡμέραι πονηραί corrupt times Eph 5:16; cp. B 2:1; 8:6. ἡμ. ἀγαθαί happy times (Artem. 4, 8) 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:13). ἀφʼ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων Ac 15:7; αἱ πρότερον ἡμ. Hb 10:32. πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας all the time, always Mt 28:20 (cp. Dt 4:40; 5:29; PsSol 14:4). νῦν τ. ἡμέραις at the present time Hs 9, 20, 4. ἐν (ταῖς) ἐσχάταις ἡμ. Ac 2:17; 2 Ti 3:1; Js 5:3; B 4:9; D 16:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τ. ἡμερῶν τούτων Hb 1:2; cp. 2 Pt 3:3; GJs 7:2. ἐν τ. ἡμέραις ἐκείναις at that time Mt 3:1; 24:19, 38; Mk 1:9; Lk 2:1; 4:2b; 5:35b. ἐν τ. ἡμ. ταύταις at this time Lk 1:39; 6:12; Ac 1:15. εἰς ταύτας τ. ἡμέρας w. respect to our time (opp. πάλαι) Hs 9, 26, 6. πρὸ τούτων τ. ἡμερῶν before this (time) Ac 5:36; 21:38; πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμ. for a short time Hb 12:10; ἐλεύσονται ἡμ. there will come a time: w. ὅταν foll. Mt 9:15; Mk 2:20a; Lk 5:35a; w. ὅτε foll. Lk 17:22 (Just., D. 40, 2). ἥξουσιν ἡμέραι ἐπί σε καί a time is coming upon you when Lk 19:43. ἡμ. ἔρχονται καί Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31). ἐλεύσονται ἡμ. ἐν αἷς Lk 21:6; 23:29.—Esp. of time of life πάσαις τ. ἡμέραις ἡμῶν for our entire lives Lk 1:75. πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας τῆς ζωῆς αὐτοῦ all his life GJs 4:1 (cp. En 103:5; TestJob 46:9). μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων without either beginning or end of life Hb 7:3. προβεβηκὼς ἐν ταῖς ἡμ. advanced in years Lk 1:7, 18; cp. 2:36 (s. Gen 18:11; 24:1; Josh 13:1; 23:1; 3 Km 1:1; προβαίνω 2).—B. 991. DELG s.v. ἦμαρ. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἡμέρα

  • 20 τετραπλασιεπιδιμερής

    A times as great (14:3): so [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεπίπεμπτος, ον, 4 1/5 times as great (21:5); [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεπιτέταρτος, ον, 4 1/4 times as great (17:4); [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεπιτετρᾰμερής, ές, 4 4/5 times as great (24:5); [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεπιτρῐμερής, ές, 4 3/4 times as great (19:4); [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεπίτρῐτος, ον, 4 1/3 times as great (13:3); [full] τετρᾰπλᾰσιεφήμῐσυς, υ, 4 1/2 times as great (9:2):—all found in, or implied by, Nicom.Ar.1.22, 23.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τετραπλασιεπιδιμερής

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • at all times — phrase always Please keep your bags with you at all times. Thesaurus: all the time and alwayssynonym Main entry: time * * * at all times : without stopping or changing at any time : ↑always …   Useful english dictionary

  • at all times — FORMAL ► always or at any time of the day: »Calls to other mobiles cost 40p a minute at all times. »This exit must be kept clear at all times. Main Entry: ↑time …   Financial and business terms

  • at all times — index always (forever) Burton s Legal Thesaurus. William C. Burton. 2006 …   Law dictionary

  • at all times — always Please keep your bags with you at all times …   English dictionary

  • Greatest Hits of All Times - Remix '88 — Infobox Album Name = Greatest Hits Of All Times Remix 88 Type = Remix Artist = Boney M. Released = October 1988 Recorded = 1976 1979, 1988 Genre = R B, Pop music, Disco Length = 49:00 Label = flagicon|West Germany Hansa Records (FRG)… …   Wikipedia

  • Greatest Hits of All Times - Remix '89 - Volume II — Infobox Album Name = Greatest Hits Of All Times Remix 89 Volume II Type = Remix Artist = Boney M. Released = November 1989 Recorded = 1977 1985, 1988, 1989 Genre = R B, Pop music, Disco Length = 50:22 Label = flagicon|West Germany Hansa Records… …   Wikipedia

  • You Are Beautiful At All Times — Студийный альбом Yppah Дата выпуска …   Википедия

  • You Are Beautiful at All Times — Infobox Album Name = You Are Beautiful at All Times Type = Album Artist = Yppah Released = 28 November 2006 Genre = Electronica Label = Ninja Tune Reviews = *Allmusic Rating|4.5|5 [http://www.allmusic.com/cg/amg.dll?p=amg sql=10:5mkpu3rran1k… …   Wikipedia

  • Kings of All Times — Infobox Book | name = Kings of All Times translator = Kerb Yl author = Kerb Yl country = Yemen language = Arabic genre = Historical novel publisher = Perspective release date = 1999 english release date = 2003Kings of All Times is a 1999… …   Wikipedia

  • all the time — {adv. phr.} 1. or[all the while] During the whole period; through the whole time. * /Mary went to college in her home town and lived at home all the while./ * /Most of us were surprised to hear that Mary and Tom had been engaged all year, but Sue …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • all the time — {adv. phr.} 1. or[all the while] During the whole period; through the whole time. * /Mary went to college in her home town and lived at home all the while./ * /Most of us were surprised to hear that Mary and Tom had been engaged all year, but Sue …   Dictionary of American idioms

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»